Manual TV Samsung 40
Manual TV Samsung 40
Manual TV Samsung 40
If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care center.
Comunquese con SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE
Si desea formular alguna pregunta o comentario en relacin con los productos de Samsung, comunquese con el centro de
atencin al cliente de SAMSUNG.
Comment contacter Samsung dans le monde
Si vous avez des suggestions ou des questions concernant les produits Samsung, veuillez contacter le Service
Consommateurs Samsung.
Country
Web Site
CANADA
1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
www.samsung.com/ca
U.S.A
1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
www.samsung.com/us
Address
Samsung Electronics Canada Inc., Customer
Service 55 Standish Court Mississauga,
Ontario L5R 4B2 Canada
Samsung Electronique Canada Inc., Service
la Clientle 55 Standish Court Mississauga,
Ontario L5R 4B2 Canada
Samsung Electronics America, Inc.
105 Challenger Road
Ridgefield Park, NJ 07660-0511
LED TV
user manual
www.samsung.com/register
Model
Serial No.
BN68-02112C-00
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 1
2009-03-30 2:22:18
Watching the LED TV in 4:3 format for a long period of time may leave traces of borders displayed on the
left, right and center of the screen caused by the difference of light emission on the screen. Playing a DVD or
a game console may cause a similar effect to the screen. Damages caused by the above effect are not
covered by the Warranty.
Displaying still images from Video games and PC for longer than a certain period of time may produce partial after-images. To
prevent this effect, reduce the brightness and contrast when displaying still images.
2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 1
2009-03-30 2:22:19
Setting up Your TV
List of Features................................................................................... 2
Accessories........................................................................................ 2
Viewing the Control Panel.................................................................. 3
Viewing the Remote Control............................................................... 4
Installing Batteries in the Remote Control.......................................... 5
Viewing the menus............................................................................. 5
Plug & Play Feature............................................................................ 7
Connections
Connecting VHF and UHF Antennas.................................................. 8
Connecting Cable TV......................................................................... 9
Viewing the Connection Panel.......................................................... 10
CHANNEL
Channel Menu.................................................................................. 13
Managing Channels.......................................................................... 14
PICTURE
Configuring the Picture Menu........................................................... 16
Viewing Picture-in-Picture................................................................ 20
Using Your TV as a Computer (PC) Display..................................... 21
Setting up the TV with your PC........................................................ 22
English
Contents
ANYNET+
Connecting Anynet+ Devices............................................................ 55
Setting Up Anynet+. ......................................................................... 56
Switching between Anynet+ Devices................................................ 56
Recording......................................................................................... 57
Listening through a Receiver (Home Theater)................................. 57
Troubleshooting for Anynet+. ........................................................... 58
InfoLink
SOUND
Configuring the Sound Menu............................................................ 23
SETUP
Configuring the Setup Menu............................................................. 25
Setting the Time................................................................................ 28
Network Connection......................................................................... 30
Setting the Network.......................................................................... 33
INPUT / SUPPORT
Input Menu........................................................................................ 36
Support Menu................................................................................... 36
Using InfoLink................................................................................... 59
Using the Weather Service............................................................... 59
Using the News Service................................................................... 60
Using the Stock Service................................................................... 60
InfoLink Setup................................................................................... 61
RECOMMENDATIONS
Troubleshooting................................................................................ 62
Installing the Stand........................................................................... 63
Disconnecting the Stand................................................................... 63
Assembling the Cables..................................................................... 64
Wall Mount Kit Specifications (VESA).............................................. 65
Preparing before installing Wall-Mount............................................. 66
Anti-Theft Kensington Lock.............................................................. 66
Securing the Installation Space........................................................ 66
Securing the TV to a Wall or Cabinet............................................... 67
Specifications................................................................................... 68
Dimensions....................................................................................... 70
License
TruSurround HD, SRS and
symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. TruSurround HD
technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Symbol
Press
Note
One-Touch Button
TOOL Button
English -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 1
2009-03-30 2:22:19
Setting up Your TV
To use your TV, you first have to set it up to suit your environment.
N Figures and illustrations in this User Manual are provided for reference only and may differ from actual product appearance.
Product design and specifications may be changed without notice in order to enhance product performance.
List of Features
Accessories
Cleaning Cloth
(BN63-01798B)
Warranty Card /
Safety Guide
Holder-Wire Cable
(BN61-05596A)
(Depending on the model)
Holder-Wire stand
(BN61-05491A)
Holder-Ring (4ea)
(BN61-05280A)
Holder-Wire (3ea)
(BN61-05373A)
Cover-Bottom
(UN32B6000: BN63-05854A)
(UN40B6000: BN63-05654A)
(UN46B6000: BN63-05654A)
(UN55B6000: BN63-05654A)
(M4xL10)
(M4xL12)
(M8xL19)
N Please make sure the following items are included with your LED TV. If any items are missing, contact your dealer.
N The items color and shape may vary depending on the model.
English -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 2
2009-03-30 2:22:22
1 REMOTE CONTROL SENSOR: Aim the remote control towards this spot on the TV.
2 P (POWER): Press to turn the TV on and off.
3 z: Press to change channels. In the on-screen menu, use the z buttons as you would use the and
buttons on the remote control.
4 y: Press to increase or decrease the volume. In the on-screen menu, use the y buttons as you would use the
and buttons on the remote control.
5 MENU: Press to see an on-screen menu of your TVs features.
6 SOURCE E: Toggles between all the available input sources. In the on-screen menu, use this button as you use the
ENTERE button on the remote control.
7 SPEAKERS
English -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 3
2009-03-30 2:22:22
b z : Press to change
channels.
2
3
4
5
^
&
*
(
)
8
9
0
!
@
c
d
e
f
#
$
English -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 4
2009-03-30 2:22:23
MENU Button
Display the main on-screen menu.
RETURN Button
Return to the previous menu.
EXIT
Exit the on-screen menu.
Picture
2. The main menu appears on the screen. The menus left side has icons : Picture, Sound,
Channel, Setup, Input, Application, Support.
Mode
: Standard
Backlight
Contrast
Brightness
Sharpness
Color
Tint (G/R)
Advanced Settings
:7
: 95
: 45
: 50
: 50
: G50/R50
English -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 5
2009-03-30 2:22:23
6. Press the or button to decrease or increase the value of a particular item. The
adjustment OSD may differ depending on the selected menu.
Mode
Picture
: Standard
Backlight
: 7
Contrast
Brightness
Sharpness
Color
Tint (G/R)
Advanced Settings
Picture Options
: 95
: 45
: 50
: 50
: G50/R50
Backlight
7
U Move L Adjust E Enter R Return
Help icon
7. Press the ENTERE button to complete the configuration. Press the EXIT button to exit.
English -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 6
2009-03-30 2:22:23
3. Press the or button to select Store Demo or Home Use, then press the ENTERE
Language
: English
Setup
1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the or button to select Setup,
then press the ENTERE button.
Language
Time
Game Mode
BD Wise
Network Type
Network Setup
V-Chip
: English
: Off
: On
: Cable
English -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 7
2009-03-30 2:22:24
Connections
Connecting VHF and UHF Antennas
If your antenna has a set of leads that look like the diagram to the right, see Antennas with 300
Flat Twin Leads below.
If your antenna has one lead that looks like the diagram to the right, see Antennas with 75
Round Leads.
If you have two antennas, see Separate VHF and UHF Antennas.
2. Plug the adaptor into the ANT IN terminal on the back of the TV.
ANT IN
UHF
VHF
2. Plug the combiner into the ANT IN terminal on the bottom of the rear panel.
UHF
VHF
ANT IN
English -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 8
2009-03-30 2:22:24
Connecting Cable TV
To connect to a cable TV system, follow the instructions below.
ANT IN
ANT IN
ANT OUT
ANT IN
2. Connect the other end of this cable to the ANT IN terminal on the back of the TV.
Incoming cable
TV Rear
Splitter
RF (A/B) Switch
Cable Box
1. Find and disconnect the cable that is connected to the ANT IN terminal on your cable box.
N This terminal might be labeled ANT IN, VHF IN or simply, IN.
2. Connect this cable to a two-way splitter.
3. Connect an RF cable between the OUTPUT terminal on the splitter and the IN terminal on the cable box.
4. Connect an RF cable between the ANT OUT terminal on the cable box and the BIN terminal on the RF(A/B) switch.
5. Connect another cable between the other OUT terminal on the splitter and the AIN terminal on the RF (A/B) switch.
6. Connect the last RF cable between the OUT terminal on the RF (A/B) switch and the ANT IN terminal on the rear of the TV.
After you have made this connection, set the A/B switch to the A position for normal viewing. Set the A/B switch to the B
position to view scrambled channels. (When you set the A/B switch to B, you will need to tune your TV to the cable boxs
output channel, which is usually channel 3 or 4.)
English -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 9
2009-03-30 2:22:25
1
4
or
or
Cable Television
Network
1 POWER INPUT
Connects the supplied power cord.
N The location of the POWER INPUT may be different depending on its model.
2 LAN
Connect a LAN cable to this port to connect to the Network.
3 ANT IN
Connects to an antenna or cable TV system.
N Use an antenna cable which is smaller than 14 mm (0.55 inch).
4 HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, 3, 4 / PC/DVI AUDIO IN
Connects to the HDMI jack of a device with an HDMI output.
N No sound connection is needed for an HDMI to HDMI connection.
N Use an HDMI cable which is smaller than 14 mm (0.55 inch).
N What is HDMI?
HDMI(High-Definition Multimedia Interface), is an interface that enables the transmission of digital audio and video
signals using a single cable.
The difference between HDMI and DVI is that the HDMI device is smaller in size and has the HDCP (High Bandwidth
Digital Copy Protection) coding feature installed.
N The TV may not output sound and pictures may be displayed with abnormal color when DVD / Blu-ray player / Cable Box /
Satellite receiver (Set-Top Box) supporting HDMI versions older than 1.3 are connected. When connecting an older HDMI
cable and there is no sound, connect the HDMI cable to the HDMI IN 1(DVI) jack and the audio cables to the PC/DVI
AUDIO IN jacks on the back of the TV. If this happens, contact the company that provided the DVD / Blu-ray player /
Cable Box / Satellite receiver (Set-Top Box) to confirm the HDMI version, then request an upgrade.
N HDMI cables that are not 1.3 may cause annoying flicker or no screen display.
N Use the HDMI IN 1(DVI) jack for DVI connection to an external device. Use a DVI to HDMI cable or DVI-HDMI adapter
(DVI to HDMI) for video connection and the PC/ DVI AUDIO IN jacks for audio. When using an HDMI / DVI cable
connection, you must use the HDMI IN 1(DVI) jack.
N When connecting via DVI, a separate audio connection must be made. Use a 2RCA to 3.5mm miniplug cable for this
purpose.
English - 10
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 10
2009-03-30 2:22:25
8
R
or
G
5 KENSINGTON LOCK
The Kensington Lock (optional) is a device used to physically fix the system when used in a public place. If you want to use a
locking device, contact the dealer where you purchased the TV.
N The location of the Kensington Lock may be different depending on its model.
6 COMPONENT IN / AV IN
Connects Component video / audio.
The COMPONENT IN jack is also used as the AV IN jack.
N When connecting, match the color of the connector to the jack.
N Connect the video cable to the COMPONENT IN [Y/VIDEO] jack and the audio cable to the COMPONENT IN [R-AUDIOL] jacks.
N If you have a mono (non-stereo) VCR, use a Y-connector (not supplied) to connect to the right and left audio input jacks
of the TV. Alternatively, connect the cable to the R jack. If your VCR is stereo, you must connect two cables.
N When connecting to AV IN, the color of the AV IN [Y/VIDEO] jack (Green) does not match the color of the video cable
(Yellow).
7 PC/DVI AUDIO IN
Connect to the audio output jack on your PC.
DVI audio input from external devices.
8 PC IN
Connects to the video and audio output jacks on your PC.
N If your PC supports an HDMI connection, you can connect this to the HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, 3 or 4 terminal.
N If your PC supports a DVI connection, you can connect this to the HDMI IN 1(DVI) / PC/DVI AUDIO terminal.
English - 11
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 11
2009-03-30 2:22:25
9
!
9 EX-LINK
Connector for service only.
0 USB1(HDD) / USB2
Connector for software upgrades and Media Play, etc. You can connect to Samsungs network wirelessly using the Samsung
Wireless LAN Adapter (Sold separately).
N For USB HDD, use the USB1(HDD) port.
N Turning on or off the TV while a USB device is connected may damage the files on the USB device.
! AUDIO OUT
Connects to the audio input jacks on your Amplifier/Home theater.
N When connecting, use the appropriate connector (sold separately).
N When an audio amplifier is connected to the AUDIO OUT jacks: Decrease the volume of the TV and adjust the volume
level with the Amplifiers volume control.
@ DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
Connects to a Digital Audio component such as a Home theater receiver.
N When a Digital Audio System is connected to the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack: Decrease the volume of the TV
and adjust the volume level with the systems volume control.
N 5.1CH audio is possible when the TV is connected to an external device supporting 5.1CH.
N When the Home Theater receiver is set to On, you can hear sound output from the TVs Optical jack. When the TV is
displaying a DTV(air) signal, the TV will send out 5.1 channel sound to the Home theater receiver. When the source is a
digital component such as a DVD / Blu-ray player / Cable Box / Satellite receiver (Set-Top Box) and is connected to the
TV via HDMI, only 2 channel sound will be heard from the Home Theater receiver. If you want to hear 5.1 channel audio,
connect the digital audio out jack on DVD / Blu-ray player / Cable Box / Satellite receiver (Set-Top Box) directly to an
Amplifier or Home Theater, not the TV.
English - 12
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 12
2009-03-30 2:22:26
CHANNEL
You can configure various settings for your TV channels with features such as Auto Program, Favorite Channels, and Signal
Strength.
Channel Menu
Antenna Air / Cable
Auto Program
Channel
Before your television can begin memorizing the available channels, you must specify the type
of signal source that is connected to the TV (i.e. an Air or a Cable system).
T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the Antenna by
selecting Tools Switch to Cable (or Switch to Air).
Antenna
: Air
Auto Program
Clear Scrambled Channel
Channel List
Fine Tune
Air: Air antenna signal. / Cable: Cable antenna signal. / Auto: Air and Cable antenna
signals
N When selecting the Cable TV system: Selects the cable system. STD, HRC and IRC identify various types of cable TV
systems. Contact your local cable company to identify the type of cable system that exists in your particular area. At this point
the signal source has been selected.
N After all the available channels are stored, it starts to remove scrambled channels (Removing scrambled channel). The Auto
program menu then reappears.
N If you want to stop Auto Programming, press the ENTERE button. The Stop Auto Program? message will be displayed.
Select Yes by pressing the or button, then press the ENTERE button.
Channel List
For detailed procedures on using the Channel List, refer to the Managing Channels instructions. (see pages 14~15)
O You can select these options by simply pressing the CH LIST button on the remote control.
English - 13
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 13
2009-03-30 2:22:26
Managing Channels
All Channels
Shows all currently available channels.
Added Channels
Shows all added channels.
Added Channels
Using this menu, you can add / delete or set favorite channels and use the program guide for
digital broadcasts.
Air
Air
4 Air
4-2 * TV #8
8 Air
13 Air
13-1 * TV #3 Alices Adventures in Wonderland
Antenna
Zoom
Select T Tools
Favorite
Shows all favorite channels.
O To select the favorite channels you have set up, press the FAV.CH button on the remote control.
Programmed
Shows all current reserved programs.
N Select a channel in the All Channels, Added Channels or Favorite screen by pressing the / buttons, and pressing the
ENTERE button. Then you can watch the selected channel.
N Using the color buttons with the Channel List
Red (Antenna): Switches to Air or Cable.
Green (Zoom): Enlarges or shrinks a channel number.
Yellow (Select): Selects multiple channel lists. You can perform the add/delete or add to Favorite/delete from Favorite
function for multiple channels at the same time. Select the required channels and press the yellow button to set all the
selected channels at the same time. The c mark appears to the left of the selected channels.
TOOLS (Tools): Displays the Add (or Delete), Add to Favorite (or Delete from Favorite), Timer Viewing, Channel
Name Edit, Select All (or Deselect All) and Auto Program menus (The Options menus may differ depending on the
situation.)
N Channel Status Display Icons
c : A channel selected by pressing the yellow button.
( : A program currently being broadcast.
* : A channel set as a Favorite.
) : A reserved program.
Channel List Option Menu (in All Channels / Added Channels / Favorite)
Add / Delete
You can delete or add a channel to display the channels you want.
N All deleted channels will be shown on the All Channels menu.
N A gray-colored channel indicates the channel has been deleted.
N The Add menu only appears for deleted channels.
N You can also delete a channel from the Added Channels or Favorite menu in the same
manner.
All Channels
Air
Air
4 Air
Delete
Add to Favorite
4-2 * TV #8
Timer Viewing
8 Air
Channel Name Ed
13 Air
Select All
13-1 * TV #3 Alices Adventures
in Wonderland
Auto Program
Antenna
Zoom
Select T Tools
English - 14
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 14
2009-03-30 2:22:26
Timer Viewing
If you reserve a program you want to watch, the channel is automatically switched to the reserved channel in the Channel List;
even when you are watching another channel. To reserve a program, set the current time first.
N Only memorized channels can be reserved.
N You can set the channel, day, month, year, hour and minute directly by pressing the number buttons on the remote control.
N Reserving a program will be shown in the Programmed menu.
N Digital Program Guide and Viewing Reservation
When a digital channel is selected, and you press the button, the Program Guide for the channel appears. You can reserve
a program according to the procedures described above.
Auto Program
N For detailed procedures on using the Auto Program, refer to the Channel Menu instructions. (see page 13)
Change Info
Select to change a viewing reservation.
Cancel Schedules
Select to cancel a viewing reservation.
Information
Select to view a viewing reservation.
(You can also change the reservation information.)
Select All
Select all reserved programs.
Programmed
Air
1 / 1 / 2009
Antenna
Zoom
English - 15
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 15
2009-03-30 2:22:26
PICTURE
You can configure various picture options such as the picture mode, aspect ratio, and color to suit your personal preferences.
Dynamic
Selects the picture for increased definition in a bright room.
Standard
Selects the picture for the optimum display in a normal environment.
Natural
Selects the picture for an optimum and eye-comfortable display.
N Natural is not available in PC mode.
Movie
Selects the picture for viewing movies in a dark room.
Picture
You can select the type of picture which best corresponds to your viewing requirements.
T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the picture mode by
selecting Tools Picture Mode.
Mode
: Standard
Backlight
Contrast
Brightness
Sharpness
Color
Tint (G/R)
Advanced Settings
:7
: 95
: 45
: 50
: 50
: G50/R50
Advanced Settings
Samsungs new TVs allow you to make even more precise picture settings than previous
models.
N Advanced Settings is available in Standard or Movie mode.
N In PC mode, you can only make changes to Dynamic Contrast, Gamma and White
Balance from among the Advanced Settings items.
Advanced Settings
Black Tone
: Off
Dynamic Contrast
: Medium
Gamma
:0
Color Space
: Native
White Balance
Flesh Tone
:0
Edge Enhancement
: On
U Move E Enter R Return
English - 16
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 16
2009-03-30 2:22:27
Gamma
You can adjust the primary color (red, green, blue) intensity.
Color Space
Color space is a color matrix composed of red, green and blue colors. Select your favorite color space to experience the most
natural color.
Auto: Auto color space automatically adjusts to the most natural color tone based on program sources.
Native: Native color space offers deep and rich color tone.
Custom: Adjusts the color range to suit your preference.
N Changing the adjustment value will refresh the adjusted screen.
N Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an input of the TV. For example, if
you have a DVD player connected to HDMI 1 and it is currently selected, settings and adjustments will be saved for the
DVD player.
Color: Red, Green, Blue, Yellow, Cyan or Magenta
N Color is available when Color Space is set to Custom.
N In Color, you can adjust the RGB values for the selected color.
N To reset the adjusted RGB value, select Reset.
Red: Adjusts the red saturation level of the selected color.
Green: Adjusts the green saturation level of the selected color.
Blue: Adjusts the blue saturation level of the selected color.
Reset: Resets the color space to the default values.
White Balance
You can adjust the color temperature for more natural picture colors.
R-Offset: Adjusts the red color darkness.
G-Offset: Adjusts the green color darkness.
B-Offset: Adjusts the blue color darkness.
R-Gain: Adjusts the red color brightness.
G-Gain: Adjusts the green color brightness.
B-Gain: Adjusts the blue color brightness.
Reset: The previously adjusted white balance will be reset to the factory defaults.
Flesh Tone
You can emphasize the pink flesh tone in the picture.
N Changing the adjustment value will refresh the adjusted screen.
xvYCC Off / On
Setting the xvYCC mode to on increases detail and color space when watching movies from an external device (ie. DVD player)
connected to the HDMI or Component IN jacks.
N xvYCC is available when the picture mode is set to Movie, and the external input is set to HDMI or Component mode.
English - 17
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 17
2009-03-30 2:22:27
Picture Options
N In PC mode, you can only make changes to the Color Tone and Size from among the
items in Picture Options.
Picture Options
Color Tone
: Normal
Size
: 16:9
Digital NR
: Auto
: Normal
Film Mode
: Off
: Off
: Standard
U Move E Enter R Return
Size
Occasionally, you may want to change the size of the image on your screen. Your TV comes
with several screen size options, each designed to work best with specific types of video input. Your cable box/satellite receiver
may have its own set of screen sizes as well. In general, though, you should view the TV in 16:9 mode as much as possible.
O Alternately, you can press the P.SIZE button on the remote control repeatedly to change the picture size.
16:9 : Sets the picture to 16:9 wide mode.
Zoom1: Magnifies the size of the picture on the screen.
Zoom2: Magnifies the size of the picture more than Zoom1.
Wide Fit: Enlarges the aspect ratio of the picture to fit the entire screen.
4:3 : Sets the picture to 4:3 normal mode.
Screen Fit: Use the function to see the full image without any cutoff when HDMI (720p/1080i/1080p), Component
(1080i/1080p) or DTV (1080i) signals are input.
16:9
16:9
Wide Fit U Move
Wide Fit
Zoom1 U Move
Zoom2 U Move
Zoom1
Zoom2
4:3
Screen Fit
4:3
Screen Fit
N When Double (, ) mode has been set in PIP, the Picture Size cannot be set.
N Temporary image retention may occur when viewing a static image on the set for more than two hours.
N After selecting Zoom1, Zoom2 or Wide Fit: Press the button to Select Position, then press the ENTERE button. Press
the or button to move the picture up and down. Then press the ENTERE button. Press the button to Select Size,
then press the ENTERE button. Press the or button to magnify or reduce the picture size in the vertical direction. Then
press the ENTERE button.
N After selecting Screen Fit in HDMI (1080i/1080p) or Component (1080i/1080p) mode, you made need to center the picture:
Press the or button to select Position, then press the ENTERE button. Press the , , or button to move the
picture.
Reset: Press the or button to select Reset, then press the ENTERE button. You can initialize the setting.
N HD (High Definition): 16:9 - 1080i/1080p (1920x1080), 720p (1280x720)
N Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an input of the TV.
Input Source
ATV, AV, Component (480i, 480p)
DTV(1080i), Component (1080i, 1080p),
HDMI (720p, 1080i, 1080p)
PC
Picture Size
16:9, Zoom1, Zoom2, 4:3
16:9, 4:3, Wide Fit, Screen Fit
16:9, 4:3
English - 18
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 18
2009-03-30 2:22:27
Auto Motion Plus 120Hz Off / Clear / Standard / Smooth / Custom / Demo
Removes drag from fast scenes with a lot of movement to provide a clearer picture.
N If you enable Auto Motion Plus 120Hz, noise may appear on the screen. If this occurs, set Auto Motion Plus 120Hz to Off.
Off: Switches Auto Motion Plus 120Hz off.
Clear: Sets Auto Motion Plus 120Hz to minimum.
Standard: Sets Auto Motion Plus 120Hz to medium.
Smooth: Sets Auto Motion Plus 120Hz to maximum.
Custom: Adjusts the blur and judder reduction level to suit your preference.
Blur Reduction: Adjusts the blur reduction level from video sources.
Judder Reduction: Adjusts the judder reduction level from video sources when playing films.
Reset: Reset the custom settings.
Demo: Displays the difference between Auto Motion Plus 120Hz on and off modes.
English - 19
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 19
2009-03-30 2:22:27
Viewing Picture-in-Picture
Main picture
Component
HDMI1/DVI, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4
PC
Setup
You can use the PIP feature to simultaneously watch the TV tuner and one external video
source. This product has one built-in tuner, which does not allow PIP to function in the same
mode. Please see PIP Settings below for details.
T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also configure PIP related
settings by selecting Tools PIP.
N If you select the PIP picture sound, refer to the Configuring the Sound Menu instructions.
(see page 24)
N PIP Settings
Light Effect
Energy Saving
: Watching TV
: Off
PIP
Sub picture
TV
PIP On / Off
You can activate or deactivate the PIP function.
PIP
Size / / /
You can select a size of the PIP-picture.
Position / / /
You can select a position of the PIP-picture.
N In Double (, ) mode, Position cannot be selected.
Channel
You can select the channel for the sub-screen.
PIP
: On
Size
Position
Air/Cable
: Air
Channel
: Air 3
English - 20
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 20
2009-03-30 2:22:27
Display Modes
If the signal from the system equals the standard signal mode, the screen is adjusted automatically. If the signal from the system
doesnt equal the standard signal mode, adjust the mode by referring to your videocard user guide; otherwise there may be no
video. For the display modes listed below, the screen image has been optimized during manufacturing.
Horizontal Frequency
(KHz)
31.469
31.469
35.000
49.726
68.681
35.910
53.783
44.772
56.456
75.231
31.469
37.861
37.500
37.879
48.077
46.875
48.363
56.476
60.023
67.500
63.981
79.976
49.702
62.795
60.000
47.712
55.935
70.635
65.290
52.500
74.620
Vertical Frequency
(Hz)
70.086
70.087
66.667
74.551
75.062
59.950
59.959
59.855
74.777
74.857
59.940
72.809
75.000
60.317
72.188
75.000
60.004
70.069
75.029
75.000
60.020
75.025
59.810
74.934
60.000
60.015
59.887
74.984
59.954
70.000
70.000
Sync Polarity
(H / V)
+/-/+
-/-/-/-/+
-/+
-/+
-/+
-/+
-/-/-/+/+
+/+
+/+
-/-/+/+
+/+
+/+
+/+
-/+
-/+
+/+
+/+
-/+
-/+
-/+
-/+
-/-
1920 x 1080p
67.500
60.000
148.500
+/+
Mode
Resolution
IBM
MAC
VESA CVT
VESA DMT
VESA GTF
VESA DMT /
DTV CEA
English - 21
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 21
2009-03-30 2:22:27
Auto Adjustment
Picture
Use the Auto Adjust function to have the TV automatically adjust the video signals it receives.
The function also automatically fine-tunes the settings and adjusts the frequency values and
positions.
T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the Auto Adjustment
by selecting Tools Auto Adjustment.
N This function does not work in DVI-Digital mode.
Brightness
Sharpness
: 45
: 50
Auto Adjustment
Screen
Advanced Settings
Picture Options
Picture Reset
Screen
Coarse / Fine
The purpose of picture quality adjustment is to remove or reduce picture noise. If the noise is
not removed by Fine-tuning alone, then adjust the frequency as best as possible (Coarse) and
Fine-tune again. After the noise has been reduced, readjust the picture so that it is aligned on
the center of screen.
PC Position
Adjust the PCs screen positioning if it does not fit the TV screen.
Press the or button to adjusting the Vertical-Position. Press the or button to adjust
the Horizontal-Position.
Screen
Coarse
50
Fine
PC Position
Image Reset
Image Reset
You can replace all image settings with the factory default values.
English - 22
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 22
2009-03-30 2:22:28
SOUND
You can configure the sound mode, volume, multi-track sound options, etc.
T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the sound mode by
selecting Tools Sound Mode.
Standard: Selects the normal sound mode.
Music: Emphasizes music over voices.
Movie: Provides the best sound for movies.
Clear Voice: Emphasizes voice over other sounds.
Custom: Recalls your customized sound settings.
Mode
: Custom
Equalizer
SRS TruSurround HD
Preferred Language
Multi-Track Sound
Auto Volume
Speaker Select
Sound Select
: Off
: English
: Mono
: Off
: TV Speaker
: Main
Equalizer
The sound settings can be adjusted to suit your personal preference.
Mode: Selects the sound mode among the predefined settings.
Balance L/R: Adjusts the balance between the right and left speaker.
100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Bandwidth Adjustment): To adjust the level of different bandwidth frequencies.
Reset: Resets the equalizer settings to the default values.
N
N
Press the MTS button on the remote control repeatedly to select Mono, Stereo or SAP.
Mono: Choose for channels that are broadcasting in mono or if you are having difficulty receiving a stereo signal.
Stereo: Choose for channels that are broadcasting in stereo.
SAP: Choose to listen to the Separate Audio Program, which is usually a foreign-language translation.
Multi-Track Sound is available only in Analog TV mode.
Depending on the particular program being broadcast, you can listen to Mono, Stereo or SAP.
English - 23
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 23
2009-03-30 2:22:28
Speaker Select
When you watch TV with it connecting to a Home theater, turn the TV speakers off so you can listen to sound from the Home
theaters (external) speakers.
External Speaker: Used to listen to the sound of the External (Home Theater) Speakers.
TV Speaker: Used to listen to the sound of the TV Speakers.
N The volume and MUTE buttons do not operate when the Speaker Select is set to External Speaker. Please set the volume
on your Home theater.
N If you select External Speaker in the Speaker Select menu, the sound settings will be limited
TV Speaker
External Speaker
Video No Signal
Sound Reset
Select the sound reset options.
Reset All
Cancel
English - 24
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 24
2009-03-30 2:22:28
SETUP
You can set up additional functions.
Setup
Time
For detailed procedures on setting up options, refer to the Setting the Time instructions.
(see pages 28~29)
Language
Time
Game Mode
BD Wise
Network Type
Network Setup
V-Chip
Caption
: English
: Off
: On
: Cable
When connecting to a game console such as PlayStation or Xbox, you can enjoy a more realistic gaming experience by
selecting game menu.
N Restrictions on game mode (Caution)
To disconnect the game console and connect another external device, set Game Mode to Off in the setup menu.
If you display the TV menu in Game Mode, the screen shakes slightly.
N Game Mode is not available in regular TV and PC mode.
N While PIP is in operation, the Game Mode function cannot be used.
N If the picture is poor when external device is connected to TV, check if Game Mode is On. Set Game Mode to Off and
connect external devices.
N If Game Mode is On:
Picture mode is automatically changed to Standard and cannot be changed.
Sound mode is automatically changed to Custom and cannot be changed. Adjust the sound using the equalizer.
The Reset Sound function is activated. Selecting the Reset function after setting the equalizer resets the equalizer
settings to the factory defaults.
BD Wise Off / On
Provides the optimal picture quality for SAMSUNG DVD, Blu-ray and Home Theater products which support BD Wise. You can
enjoy a richer picture when using them connected to this Samsung TV.
N Connect SAMSUNG products that have BD Wise using an HDMI cable.
N When the BD Wise set to On, the picture mode is automatically changed to the optimal resolution.
N BD Wise is available in HDMI mode.
V-Chip
The V-Chip feature automatically locks out programs that are deemed inappropriate for children. The user must enter a PIN
(personal ID number) before any of the V-Chip restrictions are set up or changed.
N V-Chip function is not available in HDMI, Component or PC mode.
N The default PIN number of a new TV set is 0-0-0-0
N Allow all: Press to unlock all TV ratings. / Block all: Press to lock all TV ratings.
Change PIN
The Change PIN screen will appear. Choose any 4 digits for your PIN and enter them. As soon as the 4 digits are entered,
the Confirm New PIN screen appears. Re-enter the same 4 digits. When the Confirm screen disappears, your PIN has been
memorized.
N If you forget the PIN, press the remote-control buttons in the following sequence, which resets the pin to 0-0-0-0 : POWER
(off) MUTE 8 2 4 POWER (on).
English - 25
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 25
2009-03-30 2:22:28
TV Parental Guidelines
You can block TV programs depending on their rating. This function allows you to control what
TV Parental Guidelines
your children are watching.
ALL FV V S L D
Allow All
TV-Y: Young children / TV-Y7: Children 7 and over / TV-G: General audience / TV-PG:
TV-Y
Block All
TV-Y7
Parental guidance / TV-14: Viewers 14 and over / TV-MA: Mature audience
TV-G
ALL: Lock all TV ratings. / FV: Fantasy violence / V: Violence / S: Sexual situation / L:
TV-PG
Adult Language / D: Sexually Suggestive Dialog
TV-14
N The V-Chip will automatically block certain categories that are more restrictive. For
TV-MA
example, if you block TV-Y category, then TV-Y7 will automatically be blocked. Similarly,
n Move E Enter R Return
if you block the TV-G category, then all the categories in the young adult group will be
blocked (TV-G, TV-PG, TV-14 and TV-MA). The sub-ratings (D, L, S, V) work together
similarly.
N The V-chip will automatically block certain categories that are More restrictive. For example, if you block L sub-rating in TVPG, then the L sub-ratings in TV-14 and TV-MA will automatically be blocked.
MPAA Rating
You can block movies depending on their MPAA rating. The Motion Picture Association of
MPAA Rating
America(MPAA) has implemented a rating system that provides parents or guardians with
G
advance information on which films are appropriate for children.
PG
Allow All
G: General audience (no restrictions).
PG-13
Block All
R
PG: Parental guidance suggested.
NC-17
PG-13: Parents strongly cautioned.
X
R: Restricted. Children under 17 should be accompanied by an adult.
NR
NC-17: No children under age 17.
n Move E Enter R Return
X: Adults only.
NR: Not rated.
N The V-Chip will automatically block any category that is More restrictive. For example, if you block the PG-13 category, then
R, NC-17 and X will automatically be blocked also.
Canadian English
C: Programming intended for children under age 8.
C8+: Programming generally considered acceptable for children 8 years and over to watch on their own.
G: General programming, suitable for all audiences.
PG: Parental Guidance.
14+: Programming contains themes or content which may not be suitable for viewers under the age of 14.
18+: Adult programming.
N The V-Chip will automatically block any category that is More restrictive. For example, if you block G category, then PG, 14+
and 18+ will automatically be blocked also.
Canadian French
G: General
8 ans+: Programming generally considered acceptable for children 8 years and over to watch on their own.
13 ans+: Programming may not be suitable for children under the age of 13.
16 ans+: Programming is not suitable for children under the age of 16.
18 ans+: Programming restricted to adults.
N The V-Chip will automatically block any category that is More restrictive. For example, if you block 8 ans+ category, then 13
ans+, 16 ans+ and 18 ans+ will automatically be blocked also.
English - 26
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 26
2009-03-30 2:22:28
1/2
N Parental restriction information is automatically downloaded while watching DTV
Allow All
DH
channels. It may take several seconds.
Block All
MH
N The Downloadable U.S. rating menu is available for use after information is
H
VH
downloaded from the broadcasting station. However, depending on the information from
EH
the broadcasting station, it may not be available for use.
N Parental restriction levels differ depending on the broadcasting station. The default
n Move E Enter R Return
menu name and Downloadable US rating changes depending on the downloaded
information.
N Even if you set the On-screen display to your desired language, the Downloadable U.S. Rating menu will appear in English
only.
N The rating will automatically block certain categories that are more restrictive.
N The rating titles (For example: Humor Level..etc) and TV ratings (For example: DH, MH, H..etc) may differ depending on the
broadcasting station.
How to Reset the TV after the V-Chip Blocks a Channel (Emergency Escape)
If the TV is tuned to a restricted channel, the V-Chip will block it. The screen will go blank and
the following message will appear:
1. Enter your PIN, then press the or button to temporarily disable the V-Chip Lock.
N If you forget the PIN, press the remote-control buttons in the following sequence, which
resets the pin to 0-0-0-0 : POWER (off) MUTE 8 2 4 POWER (on)
Change
Enter PIN
Caption Off / On
You can switch the caption function on or off. If captions are not available, they will not be displayed on the screen.
O Press the CC button on the remote control to turn the Caption on or off.
N The Caption feature doesnt work in Component, HDMI or PC modes.
Caption Mode
You can select the desired caption mode.
N The availability of captions depends on the program being broadcast.
Default / CC1~CC4 / Text1~Text4 (analog channels only)
The Analog Caption function operates in either analog TV channel mode or when a signal is supplied from an external device
to TV. (Depending on the broadcasting signal, the Analog Caption function may operate on digital channels.)
Default / Service1~Service6 / CC1~CC4 / Text1~Text4 (digital channels only)
The Digital Captions function operates on digital channels.
N Service1~6 in digital caption mode may not be available depending on the broadcast.
English - 27
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 27
2009-03-30 2:22:29
N
N
N
N
N
Background Opacity: This option consists of Default, Transparent, Translucent, Solid and Flashing. You can change the
background opacity of the caption.
Return to Default: This option sets each of Size, Font Style, Foreground Color, Background Color, Foreground Opacity
and Background Opacity to its default.
Digital Caption Options are available only when Default and Service1 ~ Service6 can be selected in Caption Mode.
The availability of captions depends on the program being broadcast.
Default means to follow the standard set by the broadcaster.
Foreground and Background cannot be set to have the same color.
Foreground Opacity and Background Opacity cannot be both set to Transparent.
LED
PIP
For detailed procedures on setting up options, refer to the Viewing Picture-in-Picture instructions. (see page 20)
Clock Mode
You can set up the current time manually or automatically.
Auto: Set the current time automatically using the time from the digital broadcast.
Manual: Set the current time to a manually specified time.
N Depending on the broadcast station and signal, the auto time may not be set correctly. If
this occurs, set the time manually.
N The Antenna or cable must be connected in order to set the time automatically.
Setup
Setting the clock is necessary in order to use the various timer features of the TV.
O The current time will appear every time you press the INFO button.
N If you disconnect the power cord, you have to set the clock again.
: English
Time
Game Mode
BD Wise
Network Type
Network Setup
V-Chip
Caption
Melody
: Off
: On
: Cable
: Medium
Time
Clock
: -- : --
Sleep Timer
: Off
Timer 1
: Inactivated
Timer 2
: Inactivated
Timer 3
: Inactivated
Clock Set
You can set the current time manually.
U Move E Enter R Return
N This function is only available when Clock Mode is set to Manual.
N You can set the month, day, year, hour and minute directly by pressing the number buttons on the remote control.
English - 28
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 28
2009-03-30 2:22:29
Time Zone
Select your time zone.
N This function is only available when Clock Mode is set to Auto.
Sleep Timer
The sleep timer automatically shuts off the TV after a preset time (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180
minutes).
T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the sleep timer by
selecting Tools Sleep Timer.
N To cancel the Sleep Timer function, select Off.
Timer 1
On Time
00
00
Volume
10
Repeat
00
am
Inactivate
Off Time
00
Source
TV
am
Inactivate
Antenna
Channel
Air
Sat
Once
On Time
Set the hour, minute, am/pm, and activate / inactivate.
(To activate the timer with the setting youve chosen, set to Activate.)
Off Time
Set the hour, minute, am/pm, and activate / inactivate.
(To activate the timer with the setting youve chosen, set to Activate.)
Volume
Set the desired volume level.
Source TV / USB
You can select the TV or USB device content to be played when the TV turns on automatically. Select TV or USB. (Make sure that
an USB device is connected to your TV.)
N When there is only one photo file in the USB, the Slide Show will not play.
Repeat
Select Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun or Manual.
N When Manual is selected, press the button to select the desired day of the week. Press the ENTERE button over the
desired day and the c mark will appear.
N You can set the hour, minute and channel by pressing the number buttons on the remote control.
N Auto Power Off
When you set the timer on, the television will eventually turn off, if no controls are operated for 3 hours after the TV was turned
on by the timer. This function is only available in timer on mode and prevents overheating, which may occur if a TV is on for
too long time.
English - 29
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 29
2009-03-30 2:22:29
Network Connection
You can set up the Internet Protocol so that you can communicate with various connected networks.
External Modem
(ADSL / VDSL / Cable TV)
2 Modem Cable
TV Rear Panel
1 LAN Cable
Modem Cable
TV Rear Panel
IP Sharer
LAN Cable
LAN Cable
You can connect the LAN port and the TV directly depending on your network status.
TV Rear Panel
LAN Cable
N The terminals (the position of the port and the type) of the external device may differ depending on the manufacturer.
N If the IP address allocation by the DHCP server has failed, turn the external modem off, turn it on again after at least 10
seconds and then try again.
N For the connections between the external modem and the Sharer (Router), refer to the owners manual of the corresponding
product.
N You can connect the TV to the LAN directly without connecting it through a Sharer (Router)
N You cannot use a manual-connection-type ADSL modem because it does not support DHCP. You have to use an automaticconnection-type ADSL modem.
English - 30
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 30
2009-03-30 2:22:30
TV Rear Panel
1 LAN Cable
TV Rear Panel
IP Sharer
LAN Cable
LAN Cable
N The terminals (the position of the port and the type) of the external device may differ depending on the manufacturer.
N If you are using a static IP address, your ISP will inform you of the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS. You must
enter these values to complete the network settings. If you do not know the values, ask your network administrator.
N For the information on how to configure and connect a Sharer (Router), refer to the owners manual for the corresponding
product.
N You can connect the TV to the LAN directly without connecting it through a Sharer (Router).
N If you use an IP Sharer (IP Router) that supports DHCP, you can set up the device as either DHCP or static IP.
N For the procedures to use a static IP address, ask your Internet Service Provider.
English - 31
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 31
2009-03-30 2:22:30
or
Wireless IP
sharer
LAN Cable
1. Connect the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter into the USB1(HDD) or USB2 terminal of the TV.
N You must use the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter(WIS09ABGN) to use a wireless network.
N Samsungs Wireless LAN adapter is sold separately. The WIS09ABGN Wireless LAN adapter is offered by select retailers,
Ecommerce sites and Samsungparts.com.
N To use a wireless network, your TV must be connected to a wireless IP sharer. If the wireless IP sharer supports DHCP,
your TV can use a DHCP or static IP address to connect to the wireless network.
N Samsungs Wireless LAN adapter supports IEEE 802.11A, IEEE 802.11B, IEEE 802.11G, IEEE 802.11N.
N If the wireless IP sharer allows you to turn the Ping connection function on/off, turn it on.
N Select a channel for the wireless IP sharer that is not currently being used. If the channel set for the wireless IP sharer is
currently being used by another device nearby, this will result in interference and communications may fail.
N If you apply a security system other than the systems listed below, it will not work with the TV.
When applying the security key for the AP (wireless IP sharer), only the following is supported.
1) Authentication Mode : OPEN, SHARED, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK
2) Encryption Type : WEP, TKIP, AES
When applying the security key for the Ad-hoc mode, only the following is supported.
1) Authentication Mode : SHARED, WPANONE
2) Encryption Type : WEP, TKIP, AES
N If your AP supports WPS(Wi-Fi Protected Setup), you can connect to the network via PBC (Push Button Configuration) or
PIN (Personal Indentification Number). WPS will automatically configure the SSID and WPA key in either mode.
N If the device isnt certified, it may not connect to the TV via the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter.
English - 32
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 32
2009-03-30 2:22:31
Cable
Connect to the network using a cable.
Wireless
Connect to the network wirelessly.
Setup
Game Mode
BD Wise
: Off
: On
Network Type
: Cable
Network Setup
V-Chip
Caption
Melody
Light Effect
Energy Saving
PIP
: Medium
: Watching TV
: Off
Network Setup
: Auto Setup
Network Test
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
DNS Server
:
:
: Manual Setup
Network Test
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
DNS Server
:
:
English - 33
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 33
2009-03-30 2:22:31
Search
Ad-hoc
3/9
sson
jee
AP_1
Ap_2
PBC
PIN
Security Key
Connecting by using PBC: Select a PBC (Push Button Configuration). Press the PBC
button on the AP (access point) within 2 minutes, and wait for connection.
Connecting by using Security Key: When selecting Security Key, the input window is
displayed. Input the security key and press Blue button.
N Try again if connecting operation doesnt work.
B
P
D
R
G
U
Number
Lowercase
Delete
Done
If Security Key is not set: When the security setting of AP that supports WPS is NONE,
you can select PBC, PIN, None Security. None Security is capable of connecting to AP
directly without using WPS function.
N Process of PBC, PIN is same as above. Refer to if Security Key is already set.
N Try again if connecting operation doesnt work.
Search
Ad-hoc
3/9
sson
jee
AP_1
Ap_2
PBC
PIN
None Security
English - 34
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 34
2009-03-30 2:22:32
Ad-hoc: You can connect to a mobile device without an access point through the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter by
using a peer to peer network.
Yes
3. Input the generated Network Name(SSID) and Security Key into the
device you want to connect.
No
: Auto Setup
Network Test
Select a network
: AP1
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
DNS Server
:
:
: Manual Setup
Network Test
Select a network
: AP1
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
DNS Server
:
:
English - 35
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 35
2009-03-30 2:22:32
INPUT / SUPPORT
Input Menu
Source List
Input
Use to select TV or other external input sources such as DVD / Blu-ray players / Cable Box /
Satellite receivers (Set-Top Box) connected to the TV. Use to select the input source of your
choice.
O Press the SOURCE button on the remote control to view an external signal source.
Source List
Edit Name
Source List
TV
PC
: - - - -
AV
Component
HDMI1/DVI
HDMI2
: - - - : - - - : - - - : - - - -
Refresh T Tools
Edit Name
VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV Receiver / Game / Camcorder / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray
/ HD DVD / DMA
Name the device connected to the input jacks to make your input source selection easier.
N When a PC with a resolution of 1920 x 1080@60Hz is connected to the HDMI IN 1(DVI) port, you should set the HDMI1/DVI
mode to DVI PC in the Edit Name of the Input mode.
N When connecting an HDMI/DVI cable to the HDMI IN 1(DVI) port, you should set the HDMI1/DVI mode to DVI or DVI PC in
the Edit Name of the Input mode. In this case, a separate sound connection is required.
Support Menu
Self Diagnosis
Support
Picture Test
If you think you have a picture problem, perform the picture test. Check the color pattern on the
screen to see if the problem still exists.
Yes: If the test pattern does not appear or there is noise in the test pattern, select Yes.
There may be a problem with the TV. Contact Samsungs call center for assistance.
No: If the test pattern is properly displayed, select No. There may be a problem with your
external equipment. Please check your connections. If the problem still persists, refer to the
external devices user manual.
Legal Notice
Product Guide
Self Diagnosis
Software Upgrade
HD Connection Guide
Contact Samsung
Self Diagnosis
Picture Test
Sound Test
Signal Information
U Move E Enter R Return
English - 6
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 36
2009-03-30 2:22:32
Sound Test
If you think you have a sound problem, please perform the sound test. You can check the sound by playing a built-in melody sound
through the TV.
N If you hear no sound from the TVs speakers, before performing the sound test, make sure Speaker Select is set to TV
speaker in the Sound menu.
N The melody will be heard during the test even if Speaker Select is set to External Speaker or the sound is muted by pressing
the MUTE button.
Yes: If during the sound test you can hear sound only from one speaker or not at all, select Yes. There may be a problem with
the TV. Contact Samsungs call center for assistance.
No: If you can hear sound from the speakers, select No. There may be a problem with your external equipment. Please check
your connections. If the problem still persists, refer to the external devices user manual.
Software Upgrade
Samsung may offer upgrades for the TVs firmware in the future. These upgrades can be
performed via the TV when it is connected to the Internet, or by downloading the new firmware
from samsung.com to a USB memory device.
N Current Version is the software already installed in the TV.
N Alternative Software (Backup) shows the previous version that will be replaced.
N Software is represented as Year/Month/Day_Version. The more recent the date, the
newer the software version. Installing the latest version is recommended.
By USB
Insert a USB drive containing the firmware upgrade downloaded from samsung.com into the
TV. Please be careful to not disconnect the power or remove the USB drive while upgrades
are being applied. The TV will turn off and turn on automatically after completing the firmware
upgrade. Please check the firmware version after the upgrades are complete (the new version
will have a higher number than the older version).
When software is upgraded, video and audio settings you have made will return to their default
(factory) settings. We recommend you write down your settings so that you can easily reset
them after the upgrade.
TV Rear Panel
or
USB Drive
Software Upgrade
Current Version
2009/01/17_000001
By USB
By Online
Alternative Software
2009/01/16_000000
By Online
Upgrades the software using the Internet.
N First, configure your network. For detailed procedures on using the Network Setup, refer to
the Setting the Network instructions. (see pages 30~35)
N If the internet connection doesnt operate properly, connection can be broken. please retry downloading. If the problem still
happens, download by USB and upgrade.
HD Connection Guide
This menu presents the connection method that provides the optimal quality for the HDTV. Refer to this information when
connecting external devices to the TV.
Contact Samsung
View this information when your TV does not work properly or when you want to upgrade the software. You can view the
information regarding the call center, product and software file download method.
English - 37
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 37
2009-03-30 2:22:33
TV Rear Panel
3. When the Application selection screen is displayed, press the ENTERE button
or
to select Media Play (USB).
N MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) is not supported.
N The file system supports FAT16, FAT32 and NTFS.
USB Drive
N Certain types of USB Digital camera and audio devices may not be
compatible with this TV.
N Media Play only supports USB Mass Storage Class devices (MSC). MSC
is a Mass Storage Class Bulk-Only Transport device. Examples of MSC
SUM
are Thumb drives, Flash Card Readers and USB HDD (USB HUB are not
supported.).
PHOTO
N Please connect directly to the USB port of your TV. If you are using a separate
cable connection, there may be a USB compatibility problem.
N Before connecting your device to the TV, please back up your files to prevent
them from damage or loss of data. SAMSUNG is not responsible for any data
Photo
Music
Movie
Setup
file damage or data loss.
e Exit
Device
SUM
N Connect a USB HDD to the dedicated USB1(HDD) port. Warning: Do not
exceed 1.5 amperes.
N Do not disconnect the USB device while it is loading.
N MSC supports MP3, JPEG and movie files, while a PTP device supports JPEG files only.
N The higher the resolution of the image, the longer it takes to display on the screen.
N The maximum supported JPEG resolution is 15360X8640 pixels.
N For unsupported or corrupted files, the Not Supported File Format message is displayed.
N If sort key is set to Basic View, up to 1000 files can be displayed in each folder. The other sort key can display up to 10000
files.
N MP3 files with DRM that have been downloaded from a non-free site cannot be played. Digital Rights Management (DRM)
is a technology that supports the creation of content, the distribution and management of the content in an integrated
and comprehensive way, including the protection of the rights and interests of the content providers, the prevention of the
illegal copying of contents, as well as managing billings and settlements.
N When moving to a photo, loading may take a few seconds. At this point, the loading icon will appear at the screen.
N If more than 2 PTP devices are connected, you can only use one at a time.
N If more than one MSC device is connected, some of them may not be recognized. If a device requires high power (more
than 500mA or 5V), the USB device may not be supported.
N If an over-power (Fail add new device USB1/USB2 Power Overload) warning message is displayed while you are
connecting or using a USB device, the device may not be recognized or may malfunction.
851.86MB/993.02MB Free
English - 38
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 38
2009-03-30 2:22:33
/
INFO
MEDIA.P
z, EXIT, TV
Operations
Move the cursor and select an item.
Select the currently selected item. While playing a slide show, movie, or music file:
- Pressing the ENTERE button during play pauses the play.
- Pressing the ENTERE button during pause resumes the play.
Play or pause the Slide Show, music or movie.
Return to the previous menu.
Run various functions from the Photo, Music and Movie menus.
Stop the current slide show, Music or Movie file.
Jump to previous group/Jump to next group.
Show file information.
Exit Media Play mode.
Stop Media Play mode and Returns to TV mode.
SUM
851.86MB/993.02MB Free
PHOTO
2. Press the or button to select Media Play (USB), then press the ENTERE
button.
N The Media Play (USB) menu is displayed.
Photo
SUM
Music
Movie
Device
Setup
R Return
O Press the MEDIA.P button on the remote control to display the Media Play
menu.
O Press the SOURCE button on the remote control to view the source list. Then
Press the or button to select USB.
3. Press the Red button, then press the or button to select the USB Memory. Press the ENTERE button.
N This function differs depending on the USB Memory Device.
N The selected USB device name appears at the bottom left of the screen.
4. Press the or button to select an icon (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup), then press the ENTERE button.
N To exit Media Play mode, press the MEDIA.P button on the remote control.
English - 39
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 39
2009-03-30 2:22:33
Color
Folder
Preference
2. Press the or button to select Safe Remove, then press the ENTERE
button.
3. Remove the USB device from the TV.
5/15
1231.jpg
SUM
1232.jpg
1233.jpg
Device
1234.jpg
Basic View
Timeline
Slide Show
Play Current Group
Information
Safe Remove
1235.jpg
1236.jpg
1237.jpg
Screen Display
Color
Folder
Preference
1 Basic View
Timeline
2
5/15
1232.jpg
1233.jpg
1235.jpg
1234.jpg
1236.jpg
1237.jpg
3
6
SUM
Device
1File(s) Selected
Move to either Sort key List Section, Group List Section or File List Section using the Up and Down buttons. After selecting a
section, press the or buttons to select an item.
1 Current Sort key: This field shows the current standard for sorting files. Press the or button to change the standard for
sorting files.
2 View Groups: Shows the detailed groups of the files sorted according to the selected Sort key. The sort group where the
currently selected file is contained is highlighted.
3 Currently selected file: The selected file is the file you can now control. Photo and movie files are displayed as thumbnail
images.
4 Current Device: Shows the currently selected device name. Press the Red button to select a device.
Red (Device) button: Selects a connected device.
5 Help Items
Green (Favorites Setting) button: Changes the Favorites Setting for the selected file. Press this button repeatedly until
the desired value appears.
Yellow (Select) button: Selects file from the file list. Selected files are marked with a symbol c. Press the Yellow button
again to cancel a file selection.
TOOLS (Tools) button: Displays the option menus. (The option menu changes according to the current status.)
6 Item Selection Information: Shows the number of files that are selected by pressing the Yellow button.
English - 40
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 40
2009-03-30 2:22:36
Folder
Preference
Basic View
Timeline
2. Press the or button to select Photo, then press the ENTERE button.
5/15
1231.jpg
1232.jpg
1233.jpg
1234.jpg
1235.jpg
1236.jpg
1237.jpg
Basic View
Shows the folders on the USB memory device. If you select a folder and press the ENTERE button, only the photo files
contained in the selected folder are displayed.
N When sorted according to the Basic View, you cannot set Favorite files.
Timeline
Sorts photos by date. It sorts by year and month from the earliest photo.
Folder
Sorts photos by folder. If there are many folders in USB, the photos files are shown in order in each folder. The photo file in the
Root folder is shown first and the others are shown in alphabetical order by name.
English - 41
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 41
2009-03-30 2:22:37
2. Press the or button to select Photo, then press the ENTERE button.
3. Press the or button to select the desired photo file.
N Selecting Multiple Photos
Press the or button to select the desired photo file. Then press the
Yellow button.
Repeat the above operation to select multiple photo files.
The mark c appears to the selected photo file.
4. Press the TOOLS button.
N The option menu changes according to the current status.
Color
Timeline
Folder
5/15
1231.jpg
SUM
1232.jpg
1233.jpg
Device
1234.jpg
Preference
Slide Show
Play Current Group
Change Group Info
Information
1236.jpg
1235.jpg
Safe
Remove
1237.jpg
Slide Show
Using this menu, you can play a SlideShow using the photo files on the USB memory device.
Information
The photo file information including the name, the size, the resolution, the date modified and the path is displayed.
N You can view the information of photo files during a SlideShow using the same
procedures.
O Press the INFO button to viewing the information.
Safe Remove
You can remove the device safely from the TV.
English - 42
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 42
2009-03-30 2:22:39
Color
Folder
N During the slide show, files are displayed in order from the currently shown file.
N The Slide Show progresses in the order sorted in the File List Section.
N Music files can be automatically played during the Slide Show if the Background
Music is set to On.
O While a photo list is displayed, press the (Play)/ENTERE button on the
remote control to start slide show.
N SlideShow Control Buttons
Button
ENTERE
/
TOOLS
Operations
Play/Pause the Slide Show.
Play the Slide Show.
Pause the Slide Show.
Exit Slide Show and return to the photo list.
Change the SlideShow playing speed.
Run various functions from the Photo menus.
Preference
5/15
1231.jpg
1232.jpg
SUM
1233.jpg
Basic View
Slide Show
Play Current Group
Information
Safe Remove
1235.jpg
1234.jpg
Timeline
1236.jpg
1237.jpg
Device
Normal
SUM
T Tools R Return
Color
Folder
Preference
Basic View
Timeline
1231.jpg
1232.jpg
1233.jpg
1234.jpg
1235.jpg
1236.jpg
1237.jpg
Alternatively
1. Select a Sort key and then in the File List Section, select the photos contained in
the desired group.
N To move to the previous/next group, press the (REW) or (FF) button.
SUM
Device
English - 43
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 43
2009-03-30 2:22:42
Alternatively
1. In the File List Section, press the Yellow button to select the desired photos.
2. Press the TOOLS button.
3. Press the or button to select Slide Show, then press the ENTERE button.
N The selected files will be used for the Slide Show.
Tools
Stop Slide Show
Slide Show Speed
Normal
Fade1
Rotate
Zoom
Background Music
Picture Setting
Sound Setting
Information
None / Fade1 / Fade2 / Blind / Spiral / Checker / Linear / Stairs / Wipe / Random
N This function is available only during a slide show.
Rotate
You can rotate photos saved on a USB memory device.
N Whenever you press the button, it rotates by 270, 180, 90, and 0.
N Whenever you press the button, it rotates by 90, 180, 270, and 0.
N The rotated file is not saved.
English - 44
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 44
2009-03-30 2:22:42
Zoom
You can magnify photos saved on a USB memory device. (x1 x2 x4)
N To move the enlarged photo image, press the ENTERE button, then press the /// buttons. Note that when the
enlarged picture is smaller than the original screen size, the location change function doesnt work.
N The enlarged file is not saved.
Background Music
You can select background music when watching a Slide Show.
N To use this feature, there must be music and photo files stored on the USB device.
N Loading music files is needed to change BGM mode. Play music files in music category to load.
Information
The photo file information is displayed.
Safe Remove
You can remove the device safely from the TV.
English - 45
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 45
2009-03-30 2:22:42
Folder
Preference
Basic View
Title
2. Press the or button to select Music, then press the ENTERE button.
Energetic
Lies
3/37
Glen Hans
Once Ost
2007
Soundtrack
Want Me
Way
I Love You
HaHaHa
Gold
Shine
Basic View
Shows the folders of the USB memory device. If you select a folder and press the ENTERE button, only the music files
contained in the selected folder are displayed.
N When sorted according to the Basic View, you cannot set Favorite files.
Title
Sorts the music titles in symbol/number/alphabet/special order, and shows the music file.
Artist
Sorts the music file by artist in symbol/number/alphabet/special order.
Genre
Sorts music files by the genre.
Folder
Sorts music files by the folder. If there are many folders in USB, the files are shown in order in each folder. The music file in the
Root folder is shown first and the others are shown in alphabetical order by name.
English - 46
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 46
2009-03-30 2:22:43
Genre
Folder
Preference
Energetic
Lies
SUM
3/37
Glen Hans
Once Ost
2007
Soundtrack
Want Me
Device
Way
I Love You
Basic View
Title
Gold
Shine
Information
The music file information including the name, the size, the date modified and the path is displayed.
N You can view the music file information during Play Current Group using the
same procedures.
O Press the INFO button to viewing the information.
Safe Remove
You can remove the device safely from the TV.
English - 47
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 47
2009-03-30 2:22:43
Playing Music
Playing a music file
1. Press the button to select the File List Section.
Way
I Love You
HaHaHa
TOOLS
Operations
Play/Pause the music file.
Play the music file
Pause the music file
Exit play mode and return to the music list.
Run various functions from the Music menus.
When all music files in the folder (or the selected file) are repeated. Repeat Mode is On.
When all music files in the folder (or the selected file) are played once. Repeat Mode is Off.
Alternatively
1. Select a sort key and then in the File List Section, select the files contained in the desired group.
N To move to the previous/next group, press the (REW) or (FF) button.
2. Press the TOOLS button.
3. Press the or button to select Play Current Group, then press the ENTERE button.
N The music files in the sorting group including the selected file are played.
English - 48
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 48
2009-03-30 2:22:43
Repeat Mode
On
Picture Setting
Sound Setting
Information
Safe Remove
Information
The music file information is displayed.
Safe Remove
You can remove the device safely from the TV.
Title
Folder
Preference
Basic View
Timeline
2. Press the or button to select Movie, then press the ENTERE button.
3. Press the button to move to the Sort key Section.
4. Press the or button to select a sorting standard. (Basic View, Timeline,
Title, Folder, Preference)
N The movie files are sorted according to the newly selected sorting standard.
5. Press the (Play)/ENTERE button to play the movie in the order selected.
N Movie information is automatically set. You can change the preference.
5/15
1231.avi
SUM
1232.avi
1233.avi
Device
ABCD.avi
1235.avi
1236.avi
1237.avi
Basic View
Shows the folders of the USB memory device. If you select a folder and press the ENTERE button, only the movie files
contained in the selected folder are displayed.
N When sorted according to the Basic View, you cannot set Favorite files.
Timeline
Sorts movies by date. It sorts by year and month from the earliest movie.
Title
Sorts and displays the movie titles in symbol/number/alphabet/special order.
Folder
If there are many folders in USB, the movies files are shown in order in each folder. The movie file in the Root folder is shown first
and the others are shown in alphabetical order by name.
English - 49
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 49
2009-03-30 2:22:44
2. Press the or button to select Movie, then press the ENTERE button.
3. Press the or button to select the desired Movie file.
N Selecting Multiple Movie Files
Press the or button to select the desired movie file. Then press the
Yellow button.
Repeat the above operation to select multiple movie files.
The mark c appears to the selected movie file.
4. Press the TOOLS button.
N The option menu changes according to the current status.
Folder
Preference
5/15
1231.avi
1232.avi
SUM
1233.avi
Device
ABCD.avi
Basic View
Timeline
1236.avi
1237.avi
Information
The movie file information including the name, the size, the date modified and the path
is displayed.
O Press the INFO button to viewing the information.
Safe Remove
You can remove the device safely from the TV.
ABC.avi
SUM
E Pause Jump
T Tools R Return
English - 50
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 50
2009-03-30 2:22:45
File extension
.ttxt
.smi
.srt
.sub
.sub or .txt
Format
XML
HTML
string-based
string-based
string-based
*.avi
Container
AVI
Audio codec
Resolution
Video Decoder
720x576
XviD
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
1920x1080
H.264 BP / MP / HP
MPEG4 SP / ASP
Motion JPEG
*.mkv
MKV
800x600
720x576
XviD
1920x1080
H.264 BP / MP / HP
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
Motion JPEG
XviD
H.264 BP / MP / HP
MPEG4 SP / ASP
*.mp4
*.3gp
ASF
MP4
(SMP4)
3GPP
*.vro
VRO
VOB
*.mpg
*.mpeg
PS
*.ts
*.tp
*.trp
VC1
H.264 BP / MP / HP
MPEG4 SP / ASP
XVID
H.264 BP / MP / HP
MPEG4 SP / ASP
MPEG2
MPEG1
MPEG1
MPEG2
MPEG2
TS
H.264
VC1
1920x1080
720x576
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
WMA
Motion JPEG
*.wmv
1920x1080
800x600
1920x1080
MPEG4 SP / ASP
*.asf
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
800x600
WMA
MP3
ADPCM
AAC
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
ADPCM
AAC
1920x1080
AC3
MPEG
LPCM
1920x1080
AC3
MPEG
PCM
1920x1080
AAC
MP3
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
English - 51
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 51
2009-03-30 2:22:45
TOOLS
/
/
Operations
Play/Pause the movie file
Play the movie file
Pause the movie file
Run various functions from the Movie menus.
Exit play mode and return to the movie list.
Skip forwards or backwards through the movie file.
Move to the first/last of the file.
Play the file at double speed. This function may not be supported depending on the movie file.
Alternatively
1. Select a Sort key and then in the File List Section, select the files contained in the desired group.
N To move to the previous/next group, press the (REW) or (FF) button.
2. Press the TOOLS button.
3. Press the or button to select Play Current Group, then press the ENTERE button.
N The movie files in the sorting group including the selected file are played.
English - 52
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 52
2009-03-30 2:22:45
Tools
Repeat Mode
On
Picture Setting
Sound Setting
Picture Size
Fit
Caption Setting
Information
Safe Remove
Picture Size
Fit
Play video at the TV screen size.
Original
Play video at the original size.
Caption Setting
You can set the captions for the movie.
Caption On / Off
You can turn the captions for the movie on or off.
Caption Sync
You can adjust the caption sync.
Information
The movie file information is displayed.
Safe Remove
You can remove the device safely from the TV.
English - 53
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 53
2009-03-30 2:22:45
851.86MB/993.02MB Free
SETUP
Photo
SUM
Music
Movie
Setup
e Exit
Device
Off
On
SUM
Device
Information
Select to viewing the information of the connected device.
Safe Remove
You can remove the device safely from the TV.
English - 54
BN68-02112C-Eng-2.indd 54
2009-03-31 11:49:42
ANYNET+
Connecting Anynet+ Devices
What is Anynet+?
Anynet+ is a function that enables you to control all connected Samsung devices that support Anynet+ with your Samsung TVs
remote. The Anynet+ system can be used only with Samsung devices that have the Anynet+ feature. To be sure your Samsung
device has this feature, check if there is an Anynet+ logo on it.
To connect to a TV
TV
Anynet+ Device 1
HDMI 1.
Cable
Anynet+ Device 2
Anynet+ Device
Anynet+ Device 4
1. Connect the HDMI IN (1(DVI), 2, or 4) jack on the TV and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet+ device using an
HDMI cable.
Anynet+ Device 1
Home Theater
Optical
Cable
Anynet+ Device
Anynet+ Device 4
1. Connect the HDMI IN (1(DVI), 2, or 4) jack on the TV and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet+ device using an
HDMI cable.
2. Connect the HDMI IN jack of the home theater and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet+ device using an HDMI
cable.
N Connect the Optical cable between the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack on your TV and the Digital Audio Input on
the Home Theater.
N When following the connection above, the Optical jack only outputs 2 channel audio. You will only hear sound from the
Home Theaters Front Left and Right speakers and the subwoofer. If you want to hear 5.1 channel audio, connect the
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack on the DVD / Satellite Box (ie Anynet Device 1 or 2) directly to the Amplifier or
Home Theater, not the TV.
N Connect only one Home Theater.
N You can connect an Anynet+ device using the HDMI 1.3 cable. Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet+ functions.
N Anynet+ works when the AV device supporting Anynet+ is in the Standby or On status.
N Anynet+ supports up to 12 AV devices in total. Note that you can connect up to 3 devices of the same type.
English -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 55
2009-03-30 2:22:46
Setting Up Anynet+
Media Play (USB)
Application
T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also display Anynet+ menu
by selecting Tools Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC).
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
InfoLink
Setup
N If you set Auto Turn Off to Yes, connected external devices are also turned off when the
TV is turned off. If an external device is still recording, it may or may not turn off.
Setup
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
: On
: Yes
Setup
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
: On
: Yes
View TV
Device List
Recording: DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Receiver: Off
Setup
3. Press the or button to select a particular device and press the ENTERE button. It
is switched to the selected device.
N Only when you set Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) to On in the Application menu, the Device
List menu appears.
U Move E Enter R Return
N Switching to the selected devices may take up to 2 minutes. You cannot cancel the
operation during the switching operation.
N The time required to scan for devices is determined by the number of connected devices.
N When the device scan is complete, the number of devices found are not displayed.
N Although the TV automatically searches the device list when the TV is turned on via the power button, devices connected to
the TV may not always be automatically displayed in the device list. Press the red button to search for the connected device.
N If you have selected external input mode by pressing the SOURCE button, you cannot use the Anynet+ function. Make sure to
switch to an Anynet+ device by using the Device List.
Anynet+ Menu
The Anynet+ menu changes depending on the type and status of the Anynet+ devices connected to the TV.
Anynet+ Menu
View TV
Device List
(device_name) MENU
(device_name) INFO
Recording: (*recorder)
Stop Recording: (*recorder)
Receiver
Description
Anynet+ mode changes to TV broadcast mode.
Shows the Anynet+ device list.
Shows the connected device menus. E.g. If a DVD recorder is connected, the disc menu
of the DVD recorder will appear.
Shows the play menu of the connected device. E.g. If a DVD recorder is connected, the
play menu of the DVD recorder will appear.
Starts recording immediately using the recorder. (This is only available for devices that
support the recording function.)
Stops recording.
Sound is played through the receiver.
N If more than one recording device is connected, they are displayed as (*recorder) and if only one recording device is
connected, it will be represented as (*device_name).
English - 56
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 56
2009-03-30 2:22:47
Operating Status
Available Buttons
Anynet+ Device
Numeric buttons
//// ENTERE buttons
Color buttons / EXIT button
N The Anynet+ function only works when the active source on the TV remote control is set to TV.
N The button works only while in the recordable state.
N You cannot control Anynet+ devices using the buttons on the TV. You can control Anynet+ devices only using the TV remote
control.
N The TV remote control may not work under certain conditions. If this occurs, reselect the Anynet+ device.
N The Anynet+ functions do not operate with other manufacturers products.
N The , operations may differ depending on the device.
Recording
You can make a recording of a TV program using a Samsung recorder.
1. Press the TOOLS button. Press the ENTERE button to select Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC).
2. Press the or button to select Recording Immediately and press the ENTERE
button. Recording begins.
N When there is more than one recording device
When multiple recording devices are connected, the recording devices are listed.
Press the or button to select a recording device and press the ENTERE
button. Recording begins.
N When the recording device is not displayed select Device List and press the Red
button to search devices
View TV
Device List
Recording: DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Receiver: Off
Setup
View TV
Device List
Recording: DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Receiver: Off
Setup
English - 57
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 57
2009-03-30 2:22:47
Possible Solution
Check if the device is an Anynet+ device. The Anynet+ system supports Anynet+ devices only.
Connect only one receiver (home theater).
Check if the Anynet+ device power cord is properly connected.
Check the Anynet+ devices Video/Audio/HDMI 1.3 cable connections.
Check whether Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet+ setup menu.
Check whether the TV remote control is in TV mode.
Check whether it is Anynet+ exclusive remote control.
Anynet+ doesnt work in certain situations. (Searching channels, Operating Media Play, Plug &
Play, etc.)
When connecting or removing the HDMI 1.3 cable, please make sure to search devices again or
turn your TV off and on again.
Check if the Anynet+ Function of Anynet+ device is set on.
Check if the Anynet+ device is properly connected to the TV and check if the Anynet+ (HDMICEC) is set to On in the Anynet+ Setup menu.
Press the TV button on the TV remote control to switch to TV. Then press the TOOLS button to
show the Anynet+ menu and select a menu you want.
Select View TV in the Anynet+ menu.
Press the SOURCE button on the TV remote control and select a device other than Anynet+
devices.
Press z, CH LIST, PRE-CH, and FAV.CH to change the TV mode. (Note that the
channel button operates only when a tuner-embedded Anynet+ device is not connected.)
You cannot use the remote control when you are configuring Anynet+ or switching to a view
mode.
Use the remote control when the Anynet+ setting or switching to view mode is complete.
You cannot use the play function when Plug & Play is in progress.
English - 58
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 58
2009-03-30 2:22:47
InfoLink
Using InfoLink
Media Play (USB)
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Application
You can view news, stock market and weather information services using SAMSUNGs InfoLink
service.
N For more information on how to configure your network, refer to Setting the Network.
(see pages 30~35)
N Information provided by USA TODAY via InfoLink is for the United States only. Information
for other countries is not provided.
InfoLink
Activating InfoLink
1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the or button to select
Application, then press the ENTERE button.
Weather
L Move R Return
2. Press the or button to select InfoLink, then press the ENTERE button.
3. Press the or button to select a service (Weather, News, Stocks or Setup) and press
the ENTERE button.
O Press the INFO.L button on the remote control to display the InfoLink menu.
Weather
L Move e Exit
Options
Todays Weather
Weekly Forecast
E Select R Return
Washington
59F
English - 59
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 59
2009-03-30 2:22:48
News
L Move e Exit
Options
2. Press the or button to move to the News service and press the ENTERE button.
N Press the ENTERE button to view the detailed article.
N Press the or button to view the previous or next article.
News
Money
Politics
Life
Sports
World
E Select R Return
3. Press the Red button while using the service to change the News service Option.
News
Options
Stocks
L Move e Exit
Favorite Stocks
Market Summary
Stocks & News
3. Press the Red button while using the service to change the Stocks service option.
E Select R Return
No Favorite Stocks
4. Press or button and select Stocks service option, then press the ENTERE button.
Favorite Stocks
The Favorite stock information is displayed. You can set up the Favorite Stocks by pressing the
Yellow button.
Market Summary
Dow Jones, NASDAQ and S&P 500 are toggled and the entire index, amount of up or down, and % are displayed.
No Favorite Stocks
NYSE
A-B
C-E
F-H
I-K
L-N
c
c
A
AA
AAI
AAR
AAB
3/1844
NASDAQ
English - 60
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 60
2009-03-30 2:22:49
InfoLink Setup
1. Press the INFO.L button on the remote control.
InfoLinks Setup
2. Press the or button to select Setup, then press the ENTERE button.
3. Press the or button to select the desired option, then press the ENTERE button.
N To exit the Setup service, press the RETURN button.
N To exit the InfoLink service, press the EXIT button.
Auto Launch
Display Time
Font Size
Background Color
InfoLinks Position
: Off
: 4 Hours
: Standard
: Black
Auto Launch
Determines whether to launch InfoLink automatically when the TV is turned on. You can select either Off or On.
Display Time
Determines the time to display the news service on the TV screen. You can select 4 Hours, 8 Hours, 10 Hours, or Always.
Font Size
You can select letter size Standard or Large through InfoLink service.
Background Color
You can select the Background Color of InfoLink service. The color is applied to each service, option and setup window.
InfoLinks Position
You can set the position of each InfoLink service on the screen. You can select from six preset InfoLink positions (Position
1~Position 6).
ALL THE MATERIALS AVAILABLE THROUGH INFOLINK [INFOLINK CONTENT] ARE THE PROPERTY OF THE
ORIGINATOR OF THE CONTENT [CONTENT OWNER] AND/OR ITS AFFILIATES OR LICENSORS, AND ARE
PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT, TRADEMARK, AND OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY LAWS. ALL INFOLINK CONTENT
IS PROVIDED SOLELY FOR YOUR PERSONAL NONCOMMERCIAL USE. YOU MAY NOT USE ANY INFOLINK CONTENT
IN A MANNER THAT CONSTITUTES AN INFRINGEMENT OF THE CONTENT OWNERS RIGHTS OR THAT HAS NOT
BEEN AUTHORIZED BY THE CONTENT OWNER.
MORE SPECIFICALLY, UNLESS EXPLICITLY AUTHORIZED IN THIS DISCLAIMER OR BY THE CONTENT OWNER,
YOU MAY NOT MODIFY, COPY, REPRODUCE, REPUBLISH, UPLOAD, POST, TRANSMIT, TRANSLATE, SELL, CREATE
DERIVATIVE WORKS, EXPLOIT, OR DISTRIBUTE IN ANY MANNER OR MEDIUM (INCLUDING BY EMAIL OR OTHER
ELECTRONIC MEANS) ANY INFOLINK CONTENT OR ANY OTHER MATERIAL FROM THE INFOLINK SERVICE.
CONTENT PROVIDED CONTENT OWNERS IN CONNECTION WITH THE INFOLINK SERVICE MAY BE TIME-DELAYED AS
SPECIFIED BY THE CONTENT OWNER AND/OR ITS AFFILIATES.
INFOLINK IS PROVIDED THROUGH AGREEMENT BETWEEN SAMSUNG AND THE CONTENT OWNER. INFOLINK MAY
BE TERMINATED OR INTERUPTED AT ANY TIME BY EITHER SAMSUNG OR THE CONTENT PROVIDER OR THROUGH
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT BETWEEN THEM. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE,
SHALL SAMSUNG OR THE CONTENT PROVIDER BE HELD LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT, FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, ATTORNEY FEES, EXPENSES, OR
ANY OTHER DAMAGES WHATSOEVER ARISING OUT OF, OR IN CONNECTION WITH, SUCH TERMINATION OR
INTERUPTION.
SINCE CONTENT TRANSMITTED VIA INFOLINK IS RECEIVED BY MEANS OF NETWORKS AND TRANSMISSION
FACILITIES OVER WHICH SAMSUNG HAS NO CONTROL, SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY
OR LIABILITY FOR ANY INTERRUPTION OR SUSPENSION OF INTERLINK SERVICE OR FOR THE ABSENCE OF
CONTENT RESULTING THEREFROM.
INFORMATION IN THE INFOLINK IS PROVIDED AS IS, AND CONSEQUENTLY, SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT
THE INFORMATION SO PROVIDED, EITHER EXPRESSLY OR IMPLIEDLY, FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE; AND
SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
SAMSUNG DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY, VALIDITY, TIMELINESS, LEGALITY, OR COMPLETENESS OF
ANY INFORMATION OR DATA MADE AVAILABLE THROUGH INFOLINK FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL SAMSUNG BE HELD LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT
OR TORT, FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, ATTORNEY
FEES, EXPENSES, OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES WHATSOEVER ARISING OUT OF, OR IN CONNECTION WITH, ANY
INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR AS A RESULT OF THE USE OF INFOLINK BY YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
English - 61
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 61
2009-03-30 2:22:49
RECOMMENDATIONS
Troubleshooting
If the TV seems to have a problem, first try this list of possible problems and solutions. If none of these troubleshooting tips apply,
call Samsung customer service at 1-800-SAMSUNG.
Problem
Possible Solution
Poor picture.
Try another channel. / Adjust the antenna. / Check all wire connections.
No picture or sound.
First, check the volume of units connected to your TV (digital broadcasting receiver, DVD,
cable broadcasting receiver, VCR, etc.). Then, adjust the TV volume accordingly.
Make sure the Component cables are connected to the correct jacks.
If you are using a Cable/Satellite box, you must set Closed Captioning on the box, not
your TV.
Snowy picture.
Your cable box may need a firmware upgrade. Please contact your Cable company.
Ghosting on picture.
Adjust the Coarse tuning and then adjust the Fine tuning.
Adjust the Coarse tuning and then adjust the Fine tuning.
English - 62
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 62
2009-03-30 2:22:49
Problem
Possible Solution
If the setting is not correct, use your computer utility program to change the display
settings.
Your TV supports multiscan display functions within the following frequency domain:
- Horizontal frequency (KHz): 30~60
- Vertical frequency (Hz): 60~75
- PC Maximum refresh rate (at 60 Hz): 1920 x 1080
If Screen Fit is selected with some external devices, the picture may appear distorted in
the corner of the screen. This symptom is caused by the external devices, not TV.
This appears when you press and hold the EXIT button for a while. The product settings
are reset to the factory defaults.
N This TFT LED panel uses a panel consisting of sub pixels (6 220 800) which require sophisticated technology to produce.
However, there may be few bright or dark pixels on the screen. These pixels will have no impact on the performance of the
product.
Front
English - 63
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 63
2009-03-30 2:22:51
1
2
Wall-Mount Type
English - 64
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 64
2009-03-30 2:22:56
LED-TV
PDP-TV
LFD
inches
VESA Spec. (A * B)
19~22
100 X 100
23~29
200 X 100
30~40
200 X 200
46~55
400 X 400
57~70
800 X 400
80~
1400 X 800
42~50
400 X 400
58~63
600 X 400
70~
800 X 400
80~
1400 X 800
30~39
200 X 200
40~52
400 X 400
55~70
800 X 400
70~
1400 X 800
Standard Screw
Quantity
M4
M6
M8
M8
M6
M8
Do not install your Wall Mount Kit while your TV is turned on. It may result in personal injury due to electric shock.
English - 6
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 65
2009-03-30 2:22:57
3
2
1
1. Insert the locking device into the Kensington slot on the LED TV (1) and turn it in
the locking direction (2).
2. Connect the Kensington Lock cable (3).
. Fix the Kensington Lock to a desk or a heavy stationary object.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
English - 66
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 66
2009-03-30 2:22:59
Caution: Pulling, pushing, or climbing on the TV may cause the TV to fall. In particular, ensure your children do
not hang over or destabilize the TV; doing so may cause the TV to tip over, causing serious injuries or death.
Follow all safety precautions provided on the included Safety Flyer. For added stability, install the anti-fall device
for safety purposes, as follows.
TV-Holder
Screw 1 (M8xL19)
1. Remove the screw from the top right of the rear cover of the TV. Fasten the TV-Holder to the TV by fastening Screw 1 (for
fixing the TV) into the screw hole.
N Make sure to only use the supplied screws.
cabinet
2. Firmly fasten the screws to the wall or cabinet where the TV is to be installed. Tie the TV-Holder attached to the TV and the
screws fastened on the wall or cabinet so that the TV is fixed.
N Purchase the screws to be used on the wall or cabinet separately.
N Install the TV close to the wall so that it does not fall.
N When attaching the TV to the wall, tie the cord level with the ground or slanted downwards for safety purposes.
N Confirm that the cord or link does not come loose.
N Before moving the TV, separate the connected cord first.
cabinet
cabinet
. Verify all connections are properly secured. Periodically check connections for any sign of fatigue or failure. If you have any
doubt about the security of your connections, contact a professional installer.
English - 67
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 67
2009-03-30 2:23:00
Specifications
Model Name
UN32B6000
Screen Size
(Diagonal)
32 inches
(31.5 inches measured diagonally)
PC Resolution
(Optimum)
1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz
Sound
(Output)
Dimensions (WxDxH)
Body
With stand
10W x 2
31.5 x 1.2 x 20.5 (inch) / 799 x 29.9 x 520.9 (mm)
31.5 x 10.0 x 22.8 (inch) / 799 x 255 x 579.9 (mm)
Weight
Without Stand
With Stand
Environmental Considerations
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
Stand Swivel
(Left / Right)
-20 ~ 20
Model Name
UN40B6000
Screen Size
(Diagonal)
40 inches
(40.0 inches measured diagonally)
PC Resolution
(Optimum)
1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz
Sound
(Output)
Dimensions (WxDxH)
Body
With stand
10W x 2
38.7 x 1.2 x 24.8 (inch) / 983 x 29.9 x 631 (mm)
38.7 x 10.0 x 27.1 (inch) / 983 x 255 x 688 (mm)
Weight
Without Stand
With Stand
Environmental Considerations
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
Stand Swivel
(Left / Right)
-20 ~ 20
English - 68
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 68
2009-03-30 2:23:00
Model Name
UN46B6000
Screen Size
(Diagonal)
46 inches
(46.0 inches measured diagonally)
PC Resolution
(Optimum)
1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz
Sound
(Output)
Dimensions (WxDxH)
Body
With stand
10W x 2
43.9 x 1.2 x 27.8 (inch) / 1129 x 29.9 x 705 (mm)
43.9 x 10.8 x 30.0 (inch) / 1129 x 275 x 763 (mm)
Weight
Without Stand
With Stand
Environmental Considerations
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
Stand Swivel
(Left / Right)
-20 ~ 20
Model Name
UN55B6000
Screen Size
(Diagonal)
55 inches
(54.7 inches measured diagonally)
PC Resolution
(Optimum)
1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz
Sound
(Output)
Dimensions (WxDxH)
Body
With stand
15W x 2
51.5 x 1.2 x 32.1 (inch) / 1307 x 29.9 x 815 (mm)
51.5 x 12.0 x 34.4 (inch) / 1307 x 305 x 873 (mm)
Weight
Without Stand
With Stand
Environmental Considerations
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
Stand Swivel
(Left / Right)
-20 ~ 20
English - 69
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 69
2009-03-30 2:23:00
Dimensions
UN32B6000
TOP VIEW
31.5
26.4
20.5
15.5
22.8
10.0
17.5
FRONT VIEW / SIDE VIEW
7.9
(200 mm)
7.9 (200 mm)
REAR VIEW
NOTE: All drawings are not necessarily to scale. Some
dimensions are subject to change without prior notice. Refer to
the dimensions prior to performing installation of your TV. Not
responsible for typographical or printed errors.
2009 Samsung Electronics America, Inc
English - 70
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 70
2009-03-30 2:23:00
UN40B6000
TOP VIEW
38.7
34.9
24.8
19.6
27.1
10.0
20.5
FRONT VIEW / SIDE VIEW
7.9
(200 mm)
7.9 (200 mm)
REAR VIEW
NOTE: All drawings are not necessarily to scale. Some
dimensions are subject to change without prior notice. Refer to
the dimensions prior to performing installation of your TV. Not
responsible for typographical or printed errors.
2009 Samsung Electronics America, Inc
English - 71
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 71
2009-03-30 2:23:01
UN46B6000
TOP VIEW
43.9
40.1
27.8
22.6
30.0
10.8
21.7
FRONT VIEW / SIDE VIEW
15.7
(400 mm)
15.7 (400 mm)
REAR VIEW
NOTE: All drawings are not necessarily to scale. Some
dimensions are subject to change without prior notice. Refer to
the dimensions prior to performing installation of your TV. Not
responsible for typographical or printed errors.
2009 Samsung Electronics America, Inc
English - 72
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 72
2009-03-30 2:23:01
UN55B6000
TOP VIEW
51.5
47.6
32.1
26.8
34.4
12.0
21.7
FRONT VIEW / SIDE VIEW
15.7
(400 mm)
15.7 (400 mm)
REAR VIEW
NOTE: All drawings are not necessarily to scale. Some
dimensions are subject to change without prior notice. Refer to
the dimensions prior to performing installation of your TV. Not
responsible for typographical or printed errors.
2009 Samsung Electronics America, Inc
English - 73
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 73
2009-03-30 2:23:01
This product uses parts of the software from the Independent JPEG Group.
This product uses parts of the software owned by the Freetype Project (www.freetype.org).
This product uses some software programs which are distributed under the GPL/LGPL license. Accordingly, the following
GPL and LGPL software source codes that have been used in this product can be provided after asking to vdswmanager@
samsung.com.
GPL software: Linux Kernel, Busybox, Binutils
LGPL software: Glibc, ffmpeg, smpeg, libgphoto, libusb, SDL
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 74
2009-03-30 2:23:01
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
To convey a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with
a user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying.
An interactive user interface displays Appropriate Legal Notices to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently
visible feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work
(except to the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a
copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list
meets this criterion.
Source Code.
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. Object code means any
non-source
form of a work.
A Standard Interface means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the
case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that
language.
The System Libraries of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the
normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable
use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to
the public in source code form. A Major Component, in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window
system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce
the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it.
The Corresponding Source for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an
executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not
include the works System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified
in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface
definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked
subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between
those subprograms and other parts of the work.
The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the
Corresponding Source.
The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work.
Basic Permissions.
All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the
stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output
from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work.
This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. You may make, run and
propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You
may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide
you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material
for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on
your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material
outside their relationship with you.
Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed;
section 10 makes it unnecessary.
Protecting Users Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.
No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations
under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting
circumvention of such measures.
When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent
such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any
intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the works users, your or third parties
legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures.
Conveying Verbatim Copies.
You may convey verbatim copies of the Programs source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this
License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence
of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you may offer support or warranty protection for a
fee.
Conveying Modified Source Versions.
You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code
under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date.
b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under
section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to keep intact all notices.
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 75
2009-03-30 2:23:01
c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This
License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its
parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it
does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it.
d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has
interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so.
A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which are not by their nature extensions of
the covered work, and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a storage or
distribution medium, is called an aggregate if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or
legal rights of the compilations users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate
does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate.
6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.
You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the
machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways:
a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied
by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange.
b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied
by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that
product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the
software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software
interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2)
access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge.
c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This
alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer,
in accord with subsection 6b.
d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent
access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require
recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network
server, the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent
copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding
Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for
as long as needed to satisfy these requirements.
e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and
Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d. A separable
portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not
be included in conveying the object code work.
A User Product is either (1) a consumer product, which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for
personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining
whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product
received by a particular user, normally used refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the
status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the
product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or nonconsumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product.
Installation Information for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required
to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding
Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case
prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made.
If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying
occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in
perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under
this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any
third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in
ROM).
The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service,
warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has
been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the
operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network.
Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is
publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special
password or key for unpacking, reading or copying.
7. Additional Terms.
Additional permissions are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its
conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in
this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program,
that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without
regard to the additional permissions.
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 76
2009-03-30 2:23:01
When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or
from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the
work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give
appropriate copyright permission.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the
copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms:
a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or
b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate
Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or
c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be
marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or
d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or
e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or
f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified
versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions
directly impose on those licensors and authors.
All other non-permissive additional terms are considered further restrictions within the meaning of section 10. If the Program
as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a
further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or
conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document,
provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying.
If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the
additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms.
Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as
exceptions; the above requirements apply either way.
8. Termination.
You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to
propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses
granted under the third paragraph of section 11).
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the
copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work)
from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from
you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new
licenses for the same material under section 10.
9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.
You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered
work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require
acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These
actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you
indicate your acceptance of this License to do so.
10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.
Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify
and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this
License.
An entity transaction is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing
an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party
to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the partys predecessor in
interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work
from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts.
You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example,
you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not
initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making,
using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it.
11. Patents.
A contributor is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is
based. The work thus licensed is called the contributors contributor version.
A contributors essential patent claims are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired
or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its
contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the
contributor version. For purposes of this definition, control includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner
consistent with the requirements of this License.
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 77
2009-03-30 2:23:01
Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributors essential patent
claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version.
In the following three paragraphs, a patent license is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not
to enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To
grant such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the
party.
If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not
available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or
other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange
to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the
requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. Knowingly relying means you have
actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipients use of the
covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are
valid.
If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance
of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use,
propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended
to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it.
A patent license is discriminatory if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is
conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not
convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software,
under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which
the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a)
in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in
connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or
that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007.
Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that
may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law.
12. No Surrender of Others Freedom.
If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this
License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy
simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not
convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to
whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely
from conveying the Program.
13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work
licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting
work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of
the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as
such.
14. Revised Versions of this License.
The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time.
Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU
General Public License or any later version applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify
a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.
If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that
proxys public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program.
Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any
author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version.
15. Disclaimer of Warranty.
THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM
AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE
RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. Limitation of Liability.
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA
OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF
THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 78
2009-03-30 2:23:01
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 79
2009-03-30 2:23:01
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 80
2009-03-30 2:23:01
1. Source Code.
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. Object code means any
non-source
form of a work.
A Standard Interface means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the
case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that
language.
The System Libraries of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the
normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable
use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to
the public in source code form. A Major Component, in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window
system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce
the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it.
The Corresponding Source for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an
executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not
include the works System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified
in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface
definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked
subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between
those subprograms and other parts of the work.
The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the
Corresponding Source.
The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work.
2. Basic Permissions.
All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the
stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output
from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work.
This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. You may make, run and
propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You
may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide
you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material
for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on
your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material
outside their relationship with you.
Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed;
section 10 makes it unnecessary.
3. Protecting Users Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.
No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations
under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting
circumvention of such measures.
When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent
such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any
intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the works users, your or third parties
legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures.
4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.
You may convey verbatim copies of the Programs source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this
License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence
of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you may offer support or warranty protection for a
fee.
5. Conveying Modified Source Versions.
You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code
under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date.
b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under
section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to keep intact all notices.
c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This
License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its
parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it
does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it.
d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has
interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so.
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 81
2009-03-30 2:23:02
A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which are not by their nature extensions of
the covered work, and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a storage or
distribution medium, is called an aggregate if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or
legal rights of the compilations users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate
does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate.
6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.
You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the
machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways:
a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied
by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange.
b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied
by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that
product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the
software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software
interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2)
access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge.
c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This
alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer,
in accord with subsection 6b.
d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent
access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require
recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network
server, the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent
copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding
Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for
as long as needed to satisfy these requirements.
e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and
Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d. A separable
portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not
be included in conveying the object code work.
A User Product is either (1) a consumer product, which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for
personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining
whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product
received by a particular user, normally used refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the
status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the
product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or nonconsumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product.
Installation Information for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required
to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding
Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case
prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made.
If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying
occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in
perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under
this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any
third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in
ROM).
The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service,
warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has
been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the
operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network.
Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is
publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special
password or key for unpacking, reading or copying.
7. Additional Terms.
Additional permissions are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its
conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in
this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program,
that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without
regard to the additional permissions.
When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or
from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the
work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give
appropriate copyright permission.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the
copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms:
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 82
2009-03-30 2:23:02
a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or
b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate
Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or
c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be
marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or
d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or
e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or
f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified
versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions
directly impose on those licensors and authors.
All other non-permissive additional terms are considered further restrictions within the meaning of section 10. If the Program
as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a
further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or
conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document,
provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying.
If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the
additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms.
Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as
exceptions; the above requirements apply either way.
8. Termination.
You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to
propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses
granted under the third paragraph of section 11).
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the
copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work)
from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from
you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new
licenses for the same material under section 10.
9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.
You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered
work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require
acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These
actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you
indicate your acceptance of this License to do so.
10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.
Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify
and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this
License.
An entity transaction is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing
an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party
to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the partys predecessor in
interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work
from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts.
You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example,
you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not
initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making,
using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it.
11. Patents.
A contributor is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is
based. The work thus licensed is called the contributors contributor version.
A contributors essential patent claims are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired
or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its
contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the
contributor version. For purposes of this definition, control includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner
consistent with the requirements of this License.
Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributors essential patent
claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version.
In the following three paragraphs, a patent license is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not
to enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To
grant such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the
party.
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 83
2009-03-30 2:23:02
If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not
available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or
other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange
to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the
requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. Knowingly relying means you have
actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipients use of the
covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are
valid.
If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance
of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use,
propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended
to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it.
A patent license is discriminatory if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is
conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not
convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software,
under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which
the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a)
in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in
connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or
that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007.
Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that
may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law.
12. No Surrender of Others Freedom.
If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this
License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy
simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not
convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to
whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely
from conveying the Program.
13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work
licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting
work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of
the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as
such.
14. Revised Versions of this License.
The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time.
Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU
General Public License or any later version applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify
a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.
If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that
proxys public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program.
Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any
author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version.
15. Disclaimer of Warranty.
THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM
AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE
RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. Limitation of Liability.
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA
OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF
THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.
If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms,
reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with
the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee.
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 84
2009-03-30 2:23:02
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 85
2009-03-30 2:23:02
LICENSE ISSUES
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license
apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of
any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact [email protected].
OpenSSL License
Copyright (c) 1998-2007 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: This product
includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)
4. The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact [email protected].
5. Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior
written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: This product includes software developed
by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]). This product includes software written by
Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]). The implementation was written so as to
conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following
conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL
documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@
cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Youngs, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in
a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual
message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This
product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]) The word cryptographic can be left out if
the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include
an acknowledgement: This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code
cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Eng.indb 86
2009-03-30 2:23:02
El uso del televisor LED en formato 4:3 durante un tiempo prolongado puede dejar rastros de bordes en las partes
izquierda, derecha y central de la pantalla debido a las diferencias en la emisin lumnica de la pantalla.
Reproducir un DVD o una videoconsola puede causar un efecto similar en la pantalla. La garanta no cubre estos
daos.
Ver imgenes fijas de videojuegos y PC durante ms tiempo del indicado puede producir imgenes fantasma parciales. Para evitar
este efecto, reduzca el brillo y el contraste cuando vea imgenes fijas.
2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Reservados todos los derechos.
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 1
2009-03-30 2:23:36
Contenido
Media Play (USB)
Conexiones
CANAL
Men del canal................................................................................. 13
Gestin de los canales..................................................................... 14
IMAGEN
Configuracin del men de imagen.................................................. 16
Visualizacin PIP (Imagen en imagen)............................................. 20
Uso del televisor como una pantalla de ordenador (PC).................. 21
Ajuste del televisor con el ordenador............................................... 22
ACERCA DE ANYNET+
Conexin de dispositivos Anynet+ . ................................................. 55
Configuracin de Anynet+................................................................ 56
Conmutacin entre dispositivos Anynet+ ........................................ 56
Grabacin......................................................................................... 57
Escucha a travs de un receptor (sistema Cine en casa)................ 57
Solucin de problemas de Anynet+. ................................................ 58
Espaol
InfoLink
SONIDO
Configuracin del men de sonido................................................... 23
CONFIGURACIN
Configuracin del men de configuracin........................................ 25
Configuracin de la hora.................................................................. 28
Conexin de la red........................................................................... 30
Configuracin de la red.................................................................... 33
ENTRADA / AYUDA
Men de entrada.............................................................................. 36
Men de ayuda................................................................................. 36
Uso de InfoLink................................................................................. 59
Uso del servicio meteorolgico......................................................... 59
Uso del servicio de noticias.............................................................. 60
Uso del servicio burstil.................................................................... 60
Configuracin de InfoLink................................................................. 61
RECOMENDACIONES
Identificacin de problemas.............................................................. 62
Instalacin del soporte...................................................................... 63
Desconexin del soporte.................................................................. 63
Montaje de los cables....................................................................... 64
Especificaciones del equipo de montaje en la pared (VESA).......... 65
Preparacin para instalar el montaje mural...................................... 66
Bloqueo antirrobo Kensington.......................................................... 66
Seguridad en el espacio de instalacin............................................ 66
Fijacin del televisor a una pared o un armario................................ 67
Especificaciones............................................................................... 68
Dimensiones..................................................................................... 70
Licencia
TruSurround HD, SRS y el smbolo
son marcas comerciales de SRS Labs, Inc. La tecnologa
TruSurround HD est incorporada bajo licencia de SRS Labs, Inc.
Fabricado bajo licencia de Dolby Laboratories. Dolby y el smbolo de la doble D son marcas
comerciales de Dolby Laboratories.
DivX Certificado para reproducir vdeo DivX, incluidos contenidos de alta calidad.
Smbolo
Pulsar
Nota
Botn TOOL
Espaol -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 1
2009-03-30 2:23:37
Listado de caractersticas
Accesorios
Pao de limpieza
(BN63-01798B)
Tarjeta de garanta /
Gua de seguridad
Soporte de cables
(BN61-05596A)
(Depende del Modelo)
Soporte de cables
(BN61-05491A)
Cubierta inferior
(UN32B6000: BN63-05854A)
(UN40B6000: BN63-05654A)
(UN46B6000: BN63-05654A)
(UN55B6000: BN63-05654A)
(M8xL19)
(M4xL10)
(M4xL12)
N Asegrese de que los siguientes elementos se incluyen con el televisor de pantalla LED. Si falta alguno, pngase en contacto
con su distribuidor.
N El color y la forma de los componentes pueden variar segn el modelo.
Espaol -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 2
2009-03-30 2:23:39
1 SENSOR DEL MANDO A DISTANCIA: El mando a distancia debe dirigirse hacia este punto del televisor.
2 P (ENCENDIDO): Plselo para encender o apagar el TV.
3 z: Permiten cambiar de canal. En el men de la pantalla, utilice los botones z del mismo modo que los
botones y del mando a distancia.
4 y: Plselos para subir o bajar el volumen. En el men de la pantalla, utilice los botones y del mismo modo
que los botones y del mando a distancia.
5 MENU: Plselo para ver un men en pantalla con las opciones del televisor.
6 SOURCE E: Cambia entre todas las fuentes de entrada disponibles. En el men de la pantalla, utilice este botn del mismo
modo que el botn ENTERE del mando a distancia.
7 ALTAVOCES
Espaol -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 3
2009-03-30 2:23:40
4
5
^
&
*
8
9
) ARRIBA / ABAJO /
IZQUIERDA / DERECHA /
ENTERE: Se usan para
seleccionar los elementos del
men en pantalla y cambiar los
valores del men.
a EXIT : Plselo para salir del
men.
!
@
c
d
e
f
#
$
b z: Permiten cambiar de
canal.
c MUTE M : Pulse para desactivar
momentneamente el sonido.
d P.SIZE: Seleccion del tamao de
la imagen.
e MTS: Pulse para elegir
programas mono, estreo o de
audio independiente (emisin
SAP).
f CC: Controla el decodificador de
subttulos.
Espaol -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 4
2009-03-30 2:23:40
Visualizacin de mens
Antes de usar el televisor, siga los pasos siguientes para conocer cmo explorar el men, con el fin de seleccionar y ajustar
diversas funciones.
Botn MENU
Mostrar el men de pantalla principal.
Botn RETURN
Volver al men anterior.
ENTERE /DIRECCIN
Mover el cursor y seleccionar una opcin.
Seleccionar la opcin marcada. Confirmar la
configuracin.
EXIT
Salir del men de pantalla principal.
Imagen
2. Se muestra el men principal en la pantalla. El lado izquierdo del men tiene iconos:
Imagen, Sonido, Canal, Configuracin, Entrada, Aplicaciones, Soporte tcnico.
Modo
: Normal
Luz de fondo
Contraste
Brillo
Definicin
Color
Tinte (V/R)
Configuracin avanzada
:7
: 95
: 45
: 50
: 50
: V50/R50
Espaol -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 5
2009-03-30 2:23:40
Modo
Imagen
: Normal
Luz de fondo
: 7
Contraste
Brillo
Definicin
Color
Tinte (V/R)
Configuracin avanzada
Opciones de imagen
: 95
: 45
: 50
: 50
: V50/R50
Luz de fondo
Icono de ayuda
7. Pulse el botn ENTERE para completar la configuracin. Pulse el botn EXIT para salir.
Espaol -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 6
2009-03-30 2:23:41
Configuracin
1. Pulse el botn MENU para ver el men en pantalla. Pulse el botn o para seleccionar
Configuracin y, a continuacin, pulse el botn ENTERE.
Idioma
Tiempo
Modo Juego
BD Wise
Tipo de red
Configuracin de red
V-Chip
: Espaol
: Apagado
: Encendido
: Cable
Espaol -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 7
2009-03-30 2:23:41
Conexiones
Conexin de las antenas de VHF y UHF
Si la antena tiene un conjunto de cables como el que se muestra en el diagrama de la
derecha, consulte Antenas de par de cables planos de 300 a continuacin.
ANT IN
UHF
VHF
UHF
VHF
ANT IN
Espaol -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 8
2009-03-30 2:23:41
ANT IN
ANT IN
ANT OUT
ANT IN
2. Conecte el otro extremo del cable en el terminal ANT IN de la parte posterior del TV.
Cable de entrada
Conmutador RF (A/B)
televisor
Decodificador de cable
1. Busque y desconecte el cable que est conectado al terminal ANT IN del decodificador.
N Este terminal puede estar indicado como ANT IN, VHF IN o IN.
2. Conecte este cable al divisor de dos vas.
3. Conecte el cable RF entre el terminal OUTPUT del divisor y el terminal IN del decodificador.
4. Conecte el cable RF entre el terminal ANT OUT del decodificador y el terminal BIN del conmutador RF(A/B).
5. Conecte otro cable entre el otro terminal OUT del divisor y el terminal AIN del conmutador RF (A/B).
6. Conecte el ltimo cable RF entre el terminal OUT del conmutador RF (A/B) y el terminal ANT IN en la parte posterior del
televisor.
Una vez hecha esta conexin, coloque el conmutador A/B en la posicin A para la visualizacin normal. Coloque el
conmutador A/B en la posicin B para ver los canales codificados. (Cuando site el conmutador A/B en B, deber sintonizar
el TV al canal de salida del decodificador, que normalmente es el canal 3 o 4.)
Espaol -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 9
2009-03-30 2:23:42
Panel posterior
1
4
1 ENTRADA ALIMENTACIN
Conecta el cable de alimentacin suministrado.
N La ubicacin de la entrada de alimentacin puede variar segn los modelos.
2 LAN
Conecte un cable LAN a este puerto para conectarse a la red.
3 ANT IN
Permite conectar a una antena o un sistema de TV por cable.
N Utilice un cable de antena inferior a 14 mm (0.55 pulgadas).
4 HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, 3, 4 / PC/DVI AUDIO IN
Permite conectar al terminal HDMI un dispositivo que tenga salida HDMI.
N No se necesita ninguna conexin de sonido para una conexin de HDMI a HDMI.
N Utilice un cable HDMI inferior a 14 mm (0,55 pulgadas).
N Qu es HDMI?
HDMI, o interfaz multimedia de alta definicin, es una interfaz que permite la transmisin de seales digitales de
audio y de vdeo mediante un solo cable.
La diferencia entre los dispositivos HDMI y DVI es que el HDMI es ms pequeo y tiene instalada la funcin de
codificacin HDCP (proteccin alta de la copia digital del ancho de banda).
N Puede que el televisor no proporcione salida de sonido y muestre imgenes con colores anmalos si hay conectados
reproductores de DVD / Blu-ray, o bien receptores de cable / satlite (decodificadores) que admiten versiones de HDMI
anteriores a la versin 1.3. Si se conecta un cable antiguo HDMI y no hay sonido, conecte el cable HDMI al terminal
HDMI IN 1(DVI) y los cables de audio a los terminales PC/DVI AUDIO IN de la parte posterior del televisor. Si sucede
esto, pngase en contacto con la empresa suministradora del reproductor de DVD / Blu-ray / receptor de satlite / cable
(decodificador) para confirmar la versin HDMI y solicitar una actualizacin.
N Los cables HDMI que no son 1.3 pueden causar un molesto parpadeo o que no se muestre la pantalla
N Use el terminal HDMI IN 1(DVI) para conectar el DVI a un dispositivo externo. Use un cable de DVI a HDMI o un
adaptador de DVI-HDMI (DVI a HDMI) para la conexin del vdeo y los terminales PC/DVI AUDIO IN para el audio.
Cuando se usa una conexin de cable HDMI/DVI, se debe conectar en el terminal HDMI IN 1(DVI).
N Cuando se realiza una conexin va DVI, se debe establecer una conexin de audio independiente. Utilice un cable
estreo miniclavija 2 RCA de 3,5mm.
Espaol - 10
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 10
2009-03-30 2:23:42
8
R
o
G
5 BLOQUEO KENSINGTON
El bloqueo Kensington es un dispositivo que se usa para fijar fsicamente el sistema cuando se usa en un lugar pblico. Si
desea usar un dispositivo de bloqueo, pngase en contacto con el distribuidor donde adquiri el televisor.
N La ubicacin del bloqueo Kensington puede variar segn los modelos.
6 COMPONENT IN / AV IN
Permite conectar el vdeo/audio de componentes.
El terminal COMPONENT IN tambin se usa como terminal AV IN.
N En la conexin, el color del conector y el terminal debe coincidir.
N Conecte el cable de vdeo al terminal COMPONENT IN [Y/VIDEO] y el cable de audio a los terminales COMPONENT IN
[R-AUDIO-L].
N Si tiene un reproductor de vdeo mono (sin estreo), use un conector Y (no suministrado) para conectar las terminales
de entrada de audio izquierdo o derecho del TV. Tambin se puede conectar el cable al terminal R. Si el vdeo es
estreo, tendr que conectar dos cables.
N Al conectarse a AV IN, el color del terminal AV IN [Y/VIDEO] (verde) no coincide con el color del cable de vdeo
(amarillo).
7 PC/DVI AUDIO IN
Permite conectar al terminal de salida de audio de su PC.
Entradas de audio DVI desde dispositivos externos.
8 PC IN
Permite conectar a las tomas de salida de audio y de vdeo de su PC.
N Si el ordenador admite una conexin HDMI, se puede conectar sta al terminal HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, 3 o 4.
N Si el ordenador admite una conexin DVI, se puede conectar sta al terminal HDMI IN 1(DVI) / PC/DVI AUDIO.
Espaol - 11
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 11
2009-03-30 2:23:42
9
0
W
9 EX-LINK
Conector slo para servicio.
0 USB1(HDD) / USB2
Conector para actualizaciones de software, Media Play, etc. Se puede conectar la red inalmbrica de Samsung mediante el
adaptador de LAN inalmbrica de Samsung (se vende por separado).
N Para el disco duro de USB, use el puerto USB1(HDD).
N Si enciende o apaga el televisor mientras un dispositivo USB est conectado puede daar los archivos que ste contiene.
! AUDIO OUT
Permite conectar los terminales de la entrada de audio del amplificador/sistema de Cine en casa.
N En la conexin, utilice el conector apropiado (se vende por separado).
N Cuando un amplificador de audio se conecta a los terminales AUDIO OUT: Reduzca el volumen del TV y ajuste el
volumen con el control del amplificador.
@ DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
Se conecta a un componente de audio digital como un receptor del sistema Cine en casa.
N Cuando un sistema de audio digital se conecta al terminal DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL): Reduzca el volumen del TV
y ajuste el volumen con el control del sistema.
N El audio de 5.1 canales es posible cuando el televisor est conectado a un dispositivo externo que admita 5.1 canales.
N Cuando el receptor del sistema Cine en casa est activado, se puede or la salida de sonido desde el terminal ptico del
televisor. Cuando se ve la televisin a travs de un DTV (areo), el televisor enva el sonido de 5.1 canales al receptor
del sistema Cine en casa Cuando la fuente es un componente digital, como un DVD / Blu-ray / receptor de cable o
satlite (decodificador), y est conectada al televisor a travs de HDMI, slo se oye el sonido de 2 canales del receptor
del sistema Cine en casa. Si desea or audio de 5.1 canales, conecte el terminal de salida de audio digital del DVD /
Blu-ray / receptor de cable o satlite (decodificador) directamente a un amplificador o un sistema Cine en casa, no al
televisor.
Espaol - 12
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 12
2009-03-30 2:23:43
CANAL
Puede configurar diversas opciones para los canales de televisin con funciones como Prog. Auto, Canales Favoritos e Intensidad
de Seal.
Prog. Auto
Canal
Antes de empezar a memorizar los canales disponibles, debe indicar el tipo de origen de la
seal conectada al TV (es decir, antena o sistema de cable).
T Pulse el botn TOOLS para ver el men Herramientas. Tambin puede configurar la
antena con Herramientas Cambiar a Cable (o Cambiar a Aire).
Antena
: Aire
Prog. Auto
Borrar canal encriptado
Lista de canales
Sintonia Fina
Aire: Seal de antena area. / Cable: Seal de antena del cable. / Auto: Seales de antena
area y de cable.
N Al seleccionar el sistema de TV de cable: Seleccione sistema de cable. STD, HRC e IRC identifican los diversos tipos de
sistemas de televisin por cable. Pngase en contacto con su proveedor de cable para averiguar el tipo de sistema de cable
existente en su zona. En este momento ya se ha seleccionado el origen de la seal.
N Una vez guardados todos los canales disponibles, se inicia la eliminacin de los canales codificados (Eliminando los canales
encriptados). Vuelve a mostrarse el men de programacin automtica.
N Si desea detener la programacin automtica, pulse el botn ENTERE. Aparece el mensaje Detener programacin
automtica?. Seleccin S con el botn o y, a continuacin, pulse el botn ENTERE.
Lista de canales
Para conocer el procedimiento detallado sobre cmo usar la Lista de canales, consulte las instrucciones de Gestin de los
canales. (consulte la pginas 14~15)
O Puede seleccionar estas opciones pulsando el botn CH LIST del mando a distancia.
Espaol - 13
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 13
2009-03-30 2:23:43
Canales agregados
Muestra todos los canales aadidos.
Canales agregados
Con este men puede agregar y borrar los canales o configurarlos como favoritos y usar la gua
de programas de las emisoras digitales.
Aire
Aire
4 Aire
4-2 * TV #8
8 Aire
13 Aire
13-1 * TV #3 Alices Adventures in Wonderland
Antena
Zoom
Seleccin T Herramientas
Favoritos
Muestra todos los canales favoritos.
O Si desea seleccionar los canales favoritos que ha configurado, pulse el botn FAV.CH en el mando a distancia.
Men de opciones de la lista de canales (en Todos los canales / Canales agregados / Favoritos)
Agregar / Borrar
Puede suprimir o aadir un canal para que se muestren los canales que desee.
N Todos los canales borrados se mostrarn en el men Todos los canales.
N Un canal de color gris quiere decir que se ha borrado.
N El men Agregar slo aparece con los canales borrados.
N Tambin puede borrar un canal en los mens Canales agregados o Favoritos de la
misma manera.
Aire
Aire
4 Aire
Borrar
Agregar a Favoritos
4-2 * TV #8
Visualiz. con temporiz.
8 Aire
Edicin de nombre de canal
13 Aire
Seleccionar todo
13-1 * TV #3 Alices Adventures
Prog. Auto in Wonderland
Antena
Zoom
Seleccin T Herramientas
Espaol - 14
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 14
2009-03-30 2:23:43
Prog. Auto
N Para conocer el procedimiento detallado sobre cmo usar la Prog. Auto, consulte las instrucciones de Men del canal.
(consulte la pgina 13)
Cambiar informacin
Seleccinelo para cambiar la reserva de visualizacin.
Cancelar programaciones
Seleccinelo para cancelar la reserva de visualizacin.
Informacin
Seleccinelo para ver una reserva de visualizacin.
(Tambin puede cambiar la informacin de la reserva.)
Seleccionar todo
Seleccionar todos los programas reservados.
Aire
1 / 1 / 2009
Antena
Zoom
Espaol - 15
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 15
2009-03-30 2:23:43
IMAGEN
Puede configurar diversas opciones de imgenes tales como el modo de imagen, el formato y el color para fijar sus preferencias
personales.
Dinmico
Selecciona la visualizacin con una definicin mejorada, en una habitacin luminosa.
Normal
Selecciona la visualizacin ptima de la imagen, en un entorno normal.
Natural
Selecciona la visualizacin ptima y ms confortable de la imagen.
N Natural no est disponible en los modo PC.
Cine
Selecciona la visualizacin para ver pelculas en una sala oscura.
Imagen
Puede seleccionar el tipo de imagen que mejor cumpla sus requisitos de visualizacin.
T Pulse el botn TOOLS para ver el men Herramientas. Tambin puede configurar el modo
de la imagen seleccionando Herramientas Imagen Modo.
Modo
: Normal
Luz de fondo
Contraste
Brillo
Definicin
Color
Tinte (V/R)
Configuracin avanzada
:7
: 95
: 45
: 50
: 50
: V50/R50
Configuracin avanzada
Los nuevos televisores Samsung permiten una configuracin ms precisa de la imagen que los
modelos anteriores.
N Configuracin avanzada est disponible en los modos Normal o Cine.
N En el modo PC, slo se pueden cambiar Contraste Dinm., Gamma y Balance de blanco
entre las opciones de Configuracin avanzada.
Configuracin avanzada
Tono del negro
: Apagado
Contraste Dinm.
: Medio
Gamma
:0
Espacio de color
: Nativo
Balance de blanco
Tono Piel
:0
Mejora de perfiles
: Encendido
U Mover E Ingresar R Regresar
Espaol - 16
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 16
2009-03-30 2:23:44
Gamma
Se puede ajustar la intensidad de los colores primarios (rojo, verde y azul).
Espacio de color
El espacio de color es una matriz compuesta por los colores rojo, verde y azul. Seleccione su espacio de color favorito y disfrute
de unos colores autnticamente naturales.
Auto: El espacio de color automtico ajusta el tono de color natural de acuerdo con las fuentes del programa.
Nativo: El espacio de color nativo proporciona tonos de color profundos y ricos.
Favorito: Ajusta la gamma del color segn las preferencias del usuario.
N Al cambiar el valor de ajuste se actualizar la pantalla ajustada.
N La configuracin de cada dispositivo externo conectado a una entrada del televisor se puede ajustar y guardar. Por
ejemplo, si se tiene un reproductor DVD conectado a HDMI 1 y est seleccionado, se guardarn la configuracin y los
ajustes del reproductor DVD.
Color: Rojo, Verde, Azul, Amarillo, Cian o Magenta
N Color est disponible si Espacio de color est configurado como Favorito.
N En Color, se pueden ajustar los valores RGB del color seleccionado.
N Para restablecer el valor RGB ajustado, seleccione Reiniciar.
Rojo: Ajusta el nivel de saturacin del rojo del color seleccionado.
Verde: Ajusta el nivel de saturacin del verde del color seleccionado.
Azul: Ajusta el nivel de saturacin del azul del color seleccionado.
Reiniciar: Restablece la gama de colores en los valores predeterminados.
Balance de blanco
Se puede ajustar la temperatura del color para conseguir colores ms naturales.
Bal. Rojo: Ajusta la intensidad del color rojo.
Bal. Verde: Ajusta la intensidad del color verde.
Bal. Azul: Ajusta la intensidad del color azul.
Gan. Rojo: Ajusta el brillo del color rojo.
Gan. Verde: Ajusta el brillo del color verde.
Gan. Azul: Ajusta el brillo del color azul.
Reiniciar: El balance de blanco anteriormente ajustado se restablecer con los valores predefinidos de fbrica.
Tono Piel
Permite acentuar el tono piel rosado de las imgenes.
N Al cambiar el valor de ajuste se actualizar la pantalla ajustada.
Espaol - 17
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 17
2009-03-30 2:23:44
Opciones de imagen
N En el modo PC slo se pueden hacer cambios en los elementos Tono Color y Tamao del
men Opciones de imagen.
Opciones de imagen
Tono Color
: Normal
Tamao
: 16:9
Digital NR
: Auto
N.neg HDMI
: Normal
Modo pelcula
: Apagado
: Apagado
: Normal
Tamao
Es posible que alguna vez desee cambiar el tamao de la imagen en la pantalla. El televisor se suministra con varias opciones
de tamao de la pantalla, cada una diseada para que funcione lo mejor posible con tipos especficos de entrada de vdeo. Es
posible que el receptor de satlite o cable tenga tambin su propia gama de tamaos de pantalla. Sin embargo, en general, debe
ver el televisor en el modo 16:9 tanto como sea posible.
O Tambin se puede pulsar varias veces el botn P.SIZE del mando a distancia para cambiar el tamao de la imagen.
16:9: Establece la imagen en modo panormico 16:9.
Zoom1: Aumenta el tamao de la imagen en la pantalla.
Zoom2: Aumenta el tamao de la imagen ms an que el modo Zoom1.
Ajuste ancho: Ampla la relacin de aspecto de la imagen para que se ajuste al ancho total de la pantalla.
4:3: Establece la imagen en modo normal 4:3.
Ajuste pantalla: Use esta funcin para ver toda la imagen sin cortes cuando se reciban seales de HDMI (720p/1080i/
1080p), Componente (1080i/1080p) o DTV (1080i).
16:9
16:9
Zoom1 U Mover
Zoom2 U Mover
Zoom1
Zoom2
4:3
Ajuste ancho
4:3
Ajuste pantalla
Ajuste pantalla
Imagen Tamao
16:9, Zoom1, Zoom2, 4:3
16:9, 4:3, Ajuste ancho, Ajuste pantalla
16:9, 4:3
Espaol - 18
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 18
2009-03-30 2:23:44
Auto Motion Plus 120Hz Apagado / Claro / Normal / Suave / Favorito / Demo
Elimina los retrasos de las escenas rpidas con mucho movimiento para conseguir imgenes ms claras.
N Si se habilita Auto Motion Plus 120Hz, se puede producir ruido en la pantalla. Si esto ocurre, establezca Auto Motion Plus
120Hz como Apagado.
Apagado: Auto Motion Plus 120Hz des.
Claro: Configura Auto Motion Plus 120 Hz al mnimo.
Normal: Configura Auto Motion Plus 120 Hz con el valor medio.
Suave: Configura Auto Motion Plus 120 Hz al mximo.
Favorito: Ajusta el nivel de reduccin de desenfoque y vibracin segn las preferencias del usuario.
Red. Borr. Imag.: Ajusta el nivel de reduccin de desenfoque en las fuentes de vdeo.
Red. Vibr. Imag.: Ajusta el nivel de reduccin de la vibracin en las fuentes de vdeo al reproducir pelculas.
Reiniciar: Reinicia la configuracin personalizada.
Demo: Muestra la diferencia entre los modos activado y desactivado de Auto Motion Plus 120Hz.
Espaol - 19
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 19
2009-03-30 2:23:44
Imagen principal
Componente
HDMI1/DVI, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4
PC
Configuracin
Puede usar la funcin PIP para ver simultneamente la televisin y una fuente de vdeo
externa. Este producto lleva un sintonizador incorporado que no permite la funcin PIP en el
mismo modo. En el apartado Configuracin de PIP encontrar ms detalles.
T Pulse el botn TOOLS para ver el men Herramientas. Tambin puede establecer la
configuracin PIP relacionada seleccionando Herramientas PIP.
N Si selecciona el sonido de la imagen PIP, consulte el apartado Configuracin del men de
sonido. (consulte la pgina 24)
N Configuracin de PIP
Efecto de luz
Ahorro energa
PIP
Imagen secundaria
TV
Tamao / / /
Puede seleccionar el tamao de la imagen PIP.
Posicin / / /
Puede seleccionar la posicin de la imagen PIP.
N En el modo doble (, ), Posicin no se puede seleccionar.
Canal
Puede seleccionar el canal de la pantalla secundaria.
PIP
: Encendido
Tamao
Posicin
Aire/Cable
: Aire
Canal
: Aire 3
Espaol - 20
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 20
2009-03-30 2:23:44
Modos de pantalla
Si la seal del sistema es igual al modo de seal estndar, la pantalla se ajusta automticamente. Si la seal del sistema no es
igual al modo de seal estndar, ajuste el modo consultando la gua del usuario de la tarjeta de vdeo; de lo contrario, puede no
haber seal de vdeo. La imagen de pantalla se ha optimizado durante la fabricacin para los modos de visualizacin enumerados
en la pgina siguiente.
Resolucin
Frecuencia horizontal
(kHz)
Frecuencia vertical
(Hz)
Frecuencia de reloj de
pxeles (MHz)
IBM
640 x 350
720 x 400
640 x 480
832 x 624
1152 x 870
720 x 576
1152 x 864
1280 x 720
1280 x 720
1280 x 960
640 x 480
640 x 480
640 x 480
800 x 600
800 x 600
800 x 600
1024 x 768
1024 x 768
1024 x 768
1152 x 864
1280 x 1024
1280 x 1024
1280 x 800
1280 x 800
1280 x 960
1360 x 768
1440 x 900
1440 x 900
1680 x 1050
1280 x 720
1280 x 1024
31.469
31.469
35.000
49.726
68.681
35.910
53.783
44.772
56.456
75.231
31.469
37.861
37.500
37.879
48.077
46.875
48.363
56.476
60.023
67.500
63.981
79.976
49.702
62.795
60.000
47.712
55.935
70.635
65.290
52.500
74.620
70.086
70.087
66.667
74.551
75.062
59.950
59.959
59.855
74.777
74.857
59.940
72.809
75.000
60.317
72.188
75.000
60.004
70.069
75.029
75.000
60.020
75.025
59.810
74.934
60.000
60.015
59.887
74.984
59.954
70.000
70.000
25.175
28.322
30.240
57.284
100.000
32.750
81.750
74.500
95.750
130.000
25.175
31.500
31.500
40.000
50.000
49.500
65.000
75.000
78.750
108.000
108.000
135.000
83.500
106.500
108.000
85.500
106.500
136.750
146.250
89.040
128.943
Polaridad de
sincronizacin
(H / V)
+/-/+
-/-/-/-/+
-/+
-/+
-/+
-/+
-/-/-/+/+
+/+
+/+
-/-/+/+
+/+
+/+
+/+
-/+
-/+
+/+
+/+
-/+
-/+
-/+
-/+
-/-
1920 x 1080p
67.500
60.000
148.500
+/+
MAC
VESA CVT
VESA DMT
VESA GTF
VESA DMT /
DTV CEA
Espaol - 21
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 21
2009-03-30 2:23:44
Ajuste Automtico
Brillo
Definicin
Imagen
: 45
: 50
Ajuste Automtico
Pantalla
Configuracin avanzada
Opciones de imagen
Reinicio de la imagen
Pantalla
Grueso / Fino
El objetivo del ajuste de la calidad de imagen es eliminar o reducir las interferencias. Si el ruido
no desaparece slo con la sintonizacin fina, realice los ajustes de frecuencia hasta el mximo
(Grueso) y vuelva a realizar la sintonizacin fina. Despus de reducir el ruido, vuelva a ajustar
la imagen para que quede alineada en el centro de la pantalla.
Posicin de PC
Ajuste la posicin de la pantalla del PC si no se acopla a la pantalla del TV.
Pulse los botones o para ajustar la posicin vertical. Pulse el botn o para ajustar
posicin horizontal.
Pantalla
Grueso
50
Fino
Posicin de PC
Reiniciar Imagen
Reiniciar Imagen
Puede recuperar todos los ajustes de imagen predeterminados de fbrica.
Espaol - 22
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 22
2009-03-30 2:23:45
SONIDO
Puede configurar el modo de sonido, el volumen, las opciones de sonido para varias pistas, etc.
T Pulse el botn TOOLS para ver el men Herramientas. Tambin puede configurar el modo
del sonido seleccionando Herramientas Sonido Modo.
Normal: Selecciona el modo de sonido normal.
Msica: Realza la msica respecto de las voces.
Cine: Proporciona el mejor sonido para ver pelculas.
Voz clara: Realza las voces respecto de los sonidos.
Favorito: Recupera la configuracin de sonido personalizada.
Modo
: Favorito
Ecualizador
SRS TruSurround HD
Idioma preferido
Sonido Multi-track
Vol.Auto
Seleccionar altavoz
Sel. Sonido
: Apagado
: Espaol
: Mono
: Apagado
: Altavoz de TV
: Principal
Ecualizador
Es posible ajustar los parmetros del sonido segn sus preferencias personales.
Modo: Selecciona el modo de sonido entre los valores predefinidos.
Balance I/D: Ajusta el balance entre los altavoces izquierdo y derecho.
100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (ajuste de ancho de banda): Para ajustar el nivel de las diferentes frecuencias de
ancho de banda.
Reiniciar: Devuelve los ajustes del ecualizador a los valores predeterminados.
Espaol - 23
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 23
2009-03-30 2:23:45
Seleccionar altavoz
Cuando se ve el televisor conectado a un sistema Cine en casa, se debe apagar el altavoz del televisor para que la salida de
audio del televisor utilice los altavoces del Cine en casa (externos).
Altavoz externo: Utiliza los altavoces externos (Cine en casa) para la salida del sonido.
Altavoz de TV: Utiliza los altavoces del TV para la salida del sonido.
N Los botones de volumen y MUTE no funcionan si Seleccionar altavoz est establecido en Altavoz externo. Configure el
volumen del sistema Cine en casa.
N Si selecciona Altavoz externo en el men Seleccionar altavoz, se limita la configuracin del sonido.
Altavoces internos del televisor
Altavoz de TV
Altavoz externo
Sin seal del vdeo
RF / AV / Componente / PC / HDMI
Salida de sonido
Silencio
Silencio
Reiniciar todo
Cancelar
Espaol - 24
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 24
2009-03-30 2:23:45
CONFIGURACIN
Puede ajustar las funciones adicionales del televisor.
Tiempo
Para conocer el procedimiento detallado sobre las opciones de configuracin, consulte la
instrucciones de Configuracin de la hora. (consulte la pginas 28~29)
Configuracin
Idioma
Tiempo
Modo Juego
BD Wise
Tipo de red
Configuracin de red
V-Chip
Subttulo
: Espaol
: Apagado
: Encendido
: Cable
Si conecta una consola de videojuegos, como PlayStation o Xbox, podr disfrutar de sensaciones ms realistas
seleccionando el men de juegos.
N Restricciones respecto al modo de juego (precaucin)
Para desconectar la consola de videojuegos y conectar otro dispositivo externo, configure Modo Juego en Apagado en
el men de configuracin
Cuando se muestra el men de TV en el Modo Juego, la pantalla tiembla ligeramente.
N Modo Juego no est disponible en los modos normales de TV y PC.
N Con PIP activo, la funcin Modo Juego no se puede utilizar.
N Si la imagen es deficiente cuando se conecta el dispositivo externo al televisor, compruebe si el Modo Juego est en
Encendido. Configure Modo Juego en Apagado y conecte los dispositivos externos.
N Si Modo Juego est activado:
El modo de imagen cambia automticamente a Normal y no se puede cambiar.
El modo de sonido cambia automticamente a Favorito y no se puede cambiar. Ajuste el sonido con el ecualizador.
La funcin para establecer el sonido est activada. Si selecciona la funcin de restablecer el sonido despus de
configurar el ecualizador, la configuracin de ste recupera los parmetros predeterminados de fbrica.
V-Chip
La funcin V-Chip bloquea automticamente la programacin que se considera inadecuada para los nios. El usuario debe
escribir un nmero PIN (nmero de identificacin personal) antes de establecer o cambiar las restricciones de V-Chip.
N V-Chip no est disponible en los modos HDMI, Componente o PC.
N El cdigo PIN predeterminado para un televisor nuevo es 0-0-0-0.
N Perm. todo: Se pulsa para desbloquear todos los programas de televisin. / Bloq. todo: Se pulsa para bloquear todos los
programas de televisin.
Cambiar Cdigo
Aparecer la pantalla para cambiar el cdigo PIN. Escriba un nuevo cdigo PIN de 4 dgitos. En cuanto se introducen los 4 dgitos,
aparece la pantalla Confirmar Nuevo Cdigo. Vuelva a escribir los 4 dgitos. Cuando desaparezca la pantalla de confirmacin, el
cdigo quedar memorizado.
N Si olvida su cdigo PIN, pulse los botones del mando a distancia siguiendo la secuencia siguiente, que restablece el cdigo a
0-0-0-0: POWER (apagar) MUTE 8 2 4 POWER (encender).
Espaol - 25
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 25
2009-03-30 2:23:45
Guas pater. TV
Puede bloquear los programas de TV segn su clasificacin. Esta funcin permite controlar lo
Guas pater. TV
que los nios pueden ver.
ALL FV V S L D
TV-Y: Nios pequeos / TV-Y7: Nios de ms de 7 aos / TV-G: Todos los pblicos /
TV-Y
TV-Y7
TV-PG: Supervisin paterna / TV-14: Mayores de 14 aos / TV-MA: Para adultos
TV-G
Todos: Bloquea todas las clasificaciones de TV. / FV: Violencia y fantasa / V: Violencia /
TV-PG
S: Situacin sexual / L: Lenguaje grosero / D: Dilogo de contenido sexual
TV-14
N La opcin V-Chip bloquear automticamente las categoras que son ms restrictivas.
TV-MA
Por ejemplo, si bloquea la categora TV-Y, automticamente se bloquear TV-Y7. De
n Mover E Ingresar
manera similar, si bloquea la categora TV-G, todas las categoras del grupo adolescente
quedarn bloqueadas (TV-G, TV-PG, TV-14 y TV-MA). Las subclasificaciones (D, L, S, V)
funcionan de manera similar.
N La opcin V-chip bloquear automticamente las categoras que son ms restrictivas. Por ejemplo, si bloquea la
subclasificacin L en TV-PG, las subclasificaciones L en TV-14 y TV-MA se bloquearn automticamente.
Perm. todo
Bloq. todo
R Regresar
Clas. MPAA
Puede bloquear las pelculas segn su clasificacin. La Asociacin americana de
Clas. MPAA
cinematografa (MPAA) ha creado un sistema de clasificacin que proporciona a padres y
G
tutores informacin sobre qu pelculas son apropiadas para los nios.
PG
Perm. todo
G: Todos los pblicos (sin restricciones).
PG-13
Bloq. todo
R
PG: Se sugiere la compaa de un adulto.
NC-17
PG-13: Menores acompaados de un adulto.
X
R: Restringido. Los nios menores de 17 aos deben estar acompaados por un adulto.
NR
NC-17: Prohibida la entrada a menores de 17 aos.
n Mover E Ingresar R Regresar
X: Slo adultos.
NR: Sin clasificacin.
N El V-Chip bloquear automticamente cualquier categora que sea ms restrictiva. Por ejemplo, si bloquea la categora PG13, tambin se bloquearn automticamente R, NC-17 y X.
Ingls Canadiense
C: Programacin para nios menores de 8 aos.
C8+: Programacin generalmente considerada aceptable para nios mayores de 8 aos sin acompaamiento de adultos.
G: Programacin general, ideal para todas las audiencias.
PG: Supervisin paterna.
14+: La programacin contiene temas y contenidos que puede que no sean adecuados para menores de 14 aos.
18+: Programacin para adultos.
N El V-Chip bloquear automticamente cualquier categora que sea ms restrictiva. Por ejemplo, si bloquea la categora G,
tambin se bloquearn automticamente PG, 14+ y 18+.
Francs Canadiense
G: General
8 ans+: Programacin generalmente considerada aceptable para nios mayores de 8 aos sin acompaamiento de adultos.
13 ans+: Es posible que la programacin no sea adecuada para nios menores de 13 aos.
16 ans+: Es posible que la programacin no sea adecuada para nios menores de 16 aos.
18 ans+: Programacin restringida para adultos.
N El V-Chip bloquear automticamente cualquier categora que sea ms restrictiva. Por ejemplo, si bloquea la categora 8
ans+, tambin se bloquearn automticamente 13 ans+, 16 ans+ y 18 ans+.
Espaol - 26
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 26
2009-03-30 2:23:45
1/2
U.S. Descargable est desactivado.
Perm. todo
DH
N La informacin de la restriccin de bloqueo se puede descargar
Bloq. todo
MH
automticamente mientras se ven los canales DTV. Esto puede tardar algunos
H
segundos.
VH
EH
N El men Clasificacin U.S. Descargable est disponible despus de que la
informacin se haya descargado desde la emisora. Sin embargo, segn el tipo
n Mover E Ingresar R Regresar
de informacin de la emisora, el men podra no estar disponible para su uso.
N Los niveles de restriccin de bloqueo difieren segn la emisora. El nombre de men predeterminado y la clasificacin US
descargable cambian segn la informacin descargada.
N Aunque configure la visualizacin en pantalla en su propio idioma, el men Clasificacin U.S. Descargable siempre lo ver
en ingls.
N La clasificacin bloquear automticamente ciertas categoras que son ms restrictivas.
N Los ttulos de clasificacin (por ejemplo, Humor Level (Nivel humor), etc) y las clasificaciones de televisin (por ejemplo, DH,
MH, H, etc) pueden diferir segn la emisora.
Cambio
Ingresar Cdigo
Modo de Subttulo
Puede seleccionar el modo deseado de subttulos.
N La disponibilidad de los subttulos depende del programa que se est emitiendo.
Programado / CC1~CC4 / Texto1~Texto4 (slo canales analgicos)
La funcin de subttulos analgicos funciona tanto en el modo de canal de televisin analgica como cuando la seal
proviene de un dispositivo externo. (Dependiendo de la seal de transmisin, puede funcionar en canales digitales.)
Programado / Servicio1~Servicio6 / CC1~CC4 / Texto1~Texto4 (slo canales digitales)
La funcin de subttulos digitales funciona en canales digitales.
N Servicio 1~6 pueden no estar disponibles segn el tipo de emisin.
Espaol - 27
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 27
2009-03-30 2:23:46
N
N
N
N
N
Opacidad de fondo: Esta opcin consta de Programado, Transparente, Traslcido, Slido e Intermitente. Puede cambiar
la opacidad del fondo de los subttulos.
Regresar al Predeterminado: Esta opcin reajusta las opciones Tamao, Estilo fuente, Color de primer plano, Color de
fondo, Opacidad de primer plano y Opacidad de fondo a sus valores predeterminados.
Opciones - Subttulos Dig. slo estn disponibles cuando Default y Servicio1 ~ Servicio6 se pueden seleccionar en el
Modo de Subttulo.
La disponibilidad de los subttulos depende del programa que se est emitiendo.
Programado significa que se sigue el estndar establecido por el emisor.
Las opciones de color de primer plano y color de fondo no se pueden ajustar con el mismo color.
Opacidad de primer plano y Opacidad de fondo no se pueden establecer a la vez como transparentes.
LED
PIP
Para conocer el procedimiento detallado sobre las opciones de configuracin, consulte la instrucciones de Visualizacin PIP
(Imagen en imagen). (consulte la pgina 20)
Configuracin de la hora
Reloj
Modo Reloj
Puede configurar la hora actual en forma manual o automtica.
Auto: Configura la hora actual automticamente usando la hora de la emisin digital.
Manual: Configura la hora actual en una hora especificada manualmente.
N Segn la emisora y la seal, la hora automtica no se puede ajustar correctamente. En
este caso, ajuste la hora manualmente.
N La antena y el cable se deben conectar para ajustar la hora automticamente.
Config. Reloj
Puede configurar la hora actual manualmente.
N Esta funcin slo est disponible si Modo Reloj est configurado como Manual.
N Puede ajustar el mes, el da, el ao, la hora y el minuto directamente pulsando los botones
numricos del mando a distancia.
Configuracin
Para usar las diferentes funciones del temporizador del televisor es necesario configurar el
reloj.
O La hora actual aparecer siempre que se pulse el botn INFO.
N Si desconecta el cable de alimentacin, debe configurar el reloj de nuevo.
: Espaol
Tiempo
Modo Juego
BD Wise
Tipo de red
Configuracin de red
V-Chip
Subttulo
Meloda
: Apagado
: Encendido
: Cable
: Medio
Tiempo
Reloj
: -- : --
Temporizador
: Apagado
Temporizador 1
: Desactivado
Temporizador 2
: Desactivado
Temporizador 3
: Desactivado
Espaol - 28
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 28
2009-03-30 2:23:46
Zona Tiempo
Seleccione su zona horaria.
N Esta funcin slo est disponible si Modo Reloj est configurado como Auto.
Temporizador
El temporizador de desconexin apaga automticamente el televisor despus de un perodo
prefijado (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 y 180 minutos).
T Pulse el botn TOOLS para ver el men Herramientas. Tambin puede configurar el
temporizador seleccionando Herramientas Temporizador.
N Para cancelar la funcin Temporizador Seleccione Apagado.
Temporizador 1
Hora de encendido
00
00
am
Inactivo
Hora de apagado
00
Volumen
10
Repetir
00
Origen
TV
am
Antena
Inactivo
Canal
Aire
Sb
Una vez
L Mover U Ajustar E Ingresar R Regresar
Hora de encendido
Ajuste la hora, los minutos, am/pm y Activate/ Inactivate.
(Para activar el temporizador con la configuracin deseada, establzcalo en Activar.)
Hora de apagado
Ajuste la hora, los minutos, am/pm y Activate/ Inactivate.
(Para activar el temporizador con la configuracin deseada, establzcalo en Activar.)
Volumen
Configure el nivel de volumen deseado.
Origen TV / USB
Puede seleccionar el contenido del TV o del dispositivo USB que se reproducir cuando el televisor se encienda
automticamente. Seleccin TV o USB. (Compruebe que haya un dispositivo USB conectado al televisor.)
N Si slo hay un archivo de foto en el dispositivo USB, la presentacin no se reproducir.
Repetir
Seleccin Una vez, Cada da, Lun~Vie, Lun~Sb, Sb~Dom o Manual.
N Con Manual seleccionado, pulse el botn para seleccionar el da de la semana. Pulse el botn ENTERE sobre el da
deseado; aparecer la marca c.
N Puede ajustar la hora, los minutos y el canal pulsando los botones numricos del mando a distancia.
N Apagado automtico
Si activa el temporizador, el televisor se apagar si no se pulsa ningn botn durante 3 horas, despus que el temporizador
lo haya puesto en marcha. Esta funcin slo est disponible con el temporizador activado y evita el recalentamiento que se
puede producir si el televisor est encendido durante demasiado tiempo.
Espaol - 29
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 29
2009-03-30 2:23:46
Conexin de la red
Puede configurar el protocolo de Internet para que se pueda comunicar con diversas redes conectadas.
Mdem externo
(ADSL/VDSL/TV por cable)
1 Cable LAN
Compartidor IP
Cable LAN
Cable LAN
Cable LAN
N Los terminales (la posicin del puerto y el tipo) del dispositivo externo puede variar segn el fabricante.
N Si falla la asignacin de la direccin IP por el servidor DHCP, apague el mdem externo, vuelva a encenderlo al menos
despus de 10 segundos e intntelo de nuevo.
N Para las conexiones entre el mdem externo y el compartidor (enrutador), consulte el manual del usuario del producto
correspondiente.
N Se puede conectar el televisor a la LAN directamente sin usar compartidor (enrutador).
N No se puede usar un mdem ADSL de tipo de conexin manual ya que no admite DHCP. Se debe usar un mdem ADSL de
tipo de conexin automtica.
Espaol - 30
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 30
2009-03-30 2:23:47
1 Cable LAN
Compartidor IP
Cable LAN
Cable LAN
N Las terminales (la posicin del puerto y el tipo) del dispositivo externo puede variar segn el fabricante.
N Si usa una direccin IP esttica, su ISP le informar de la direccin IP, la mscara de subred, la puerta de enlace y el DNS.
Debe introducir estos valores para completar la configuracin de la red. Si no los conoce, consulte a su administrador de la
red.
N Para obtener informacin sobre cmo configurar y conectar un compartidor (enrutador), consulte el manual del usuario del
producto correspondiente.
N Se puede conectar el televisor a la LAN directamente sin usar compartidor (enrutador).
N Si usa un compartidor IP (enrutador IP) que admite DHCP, se puede configurar el dispositivo como DHCP o IP esttico.
N Para saber cmo usar una direccin IP esttica, consulte a su proveedor de servicios de Internet.
Espaol - 31
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 31
2009-03-30 2:23:47
Compartidor
IP inalmbrico
Cable LAN
1. Conecte el adaptador de LAN inalmbrica de Samsung en el terminal USB1(HDD) o USB2 del televisor.
N Para utilizar una red inalmbrica necesita el adaptador de LAN inalmbrica de Samsung (WIS09ABGN).
N El adaptador de LAN inalmbrica de Samsung se vende por separado. El adaptador de LAN inalmbrica WIS09ABGN
se ofrece a travs de distribuidores seleccionados, sitios web de comercio electrnico y Samsungparts.com.
N Para utilizar una red inalmbrica, el televisor debe estar conectado a un compartidor IP inalmbrico. Si el compartidor
IP inalmbrico admite DHCP, el televisor puede utilizar DHCP o una direccin IP esttica para conectarse a la red
inalmbrica.
N El adaptador de LAN inalmbrica de Samsung es compatible con IEEE 802.11A, IEEE 802.11B, IEEE 802.11G e IEEE
802.11N.
N Si el compartidor IP inalmbrico permite activar o desactivar la funcin de conexin Ping, actvela.
N Seleccione un canal para el compartidor IP inalmbrico que no se est usando en ese momento. Si el canal ajustado
para el compartidor IP inalmbrico lo est usando en ese momento otro dispositivo cercano, se producirn interferencias
y es posible que la comunicacin falle.
N Si se aplica un sistema de seguridad distinto de los sistemas que se muestran a continuacin, no funcionar con el
televisor.
Cuando aplique la clave de seguridad para el punto de acceso (compartidor IP inalmbrico) slo se admiten las
opciones siguientes.
1) Modo de autenticacin: OPEN, SHARED, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK
2) Tipo de cifrado: WEP, TKIP, AES
Cuando aplique la clave de seguridad para el modo Ad-hoc, slo se admiten las opciones siguientes.
1) Modo de autenticacin: SHARED, WPANONE
2) Tipo de cifrado: WEP, TKIP, AES
N Si el punto de acceso admite WPS (Configuracin protegida Wi-Fi), puede conectarse a la red va PBC (Configuracin
del botn) o PIN (Nmero de identificacin personal). De cualquier modo, WPS configurar automticamente las claves
SSID y WPA.
N Si el dispositivo no est certificado, puede que no se conecte al televisor mediante el adaptador de LAN inalmbrica de
Samsung.
Espaol - 32
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 32
2009-03-30 2:23:47
Configuracin de la red
Tipo de red
Cable
Se conecta a la red mediante un cable.
Inalmbrico
Se conecta a la red de modo inalmbrico.
Configuracin
Modo Juego
BD Wise
: Apagado
: Encendido
Tipo de red
: Cable
Configuracin de red
V-Chip
Subttulo
Meloda
Efecto de luz
Ahorro energa
PIP
: Medio
: Modo vis. act.
: Apagado
Configuracin de red
Configuracin red cableada (cuando Tipo de red est configurado como Cable)
N Compruebe si el cable LAN est conectado.
Config. protocolo Internet Config. automtica / Config. manual
Prueba de red: Puede comprobar o confirmar el estado de conexin de la red despus de configurarla.
N Cuando no pueda conectarse a una red cableada
Si su proveedor de servicios de Internet ha registrado la direccin MAC del dispositivo utilizado para conectarse a Internet
por primera vez y autentifica la direccin MAC cada vez que se conecta a Internet, el televisor quizs no pueda conectarse a
Internet ya que la direccin MAC difiere de la del dispositivo (PC).
En tal caso, solicite a su proveedor de servicios de Internet que le explique el procedimiento para conectar dispositivos que
no sean un ordenador, por ejemplo su televisor, a Internet. Si su proveedor de servicios de Internet necesita un ID o una
contrasea para conectarse a Internet (red) su televisor quizs no puede conectarse a Internet. En tal caso, debe introducir
su ID o contrasea cuando se conecte a Internet mediante un compartidor de Internet (enrutador).
La conexin de Internet puede fallar por problemas del servidor de seguridad. En este caso, pngase en contacto con el
proveedor de servicios de Internet. Si no puede conectarse a Internet aunque haya seguido el procedimiento de su proveedor
de servicios de Internet, debe ponerse en contacto con el centro de servicio tcnico de Samsung Electronics a travs de 1800-SAMSUNG.
: Config. automtica
Prueba de red
Direccin IP
Mscara de subred
Puerta de enlace
Servidor DNS
:
:
: Config. manual
Prueba de red
Direccin IP
Mscara de subred
Puerta de enlace
Servidor DNS
Espaol - 33
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 33
2009-03-30 2:23:48
Buscar
Ad-hoc
3/9
sson
jee
AP_1
Ap_2
PBC
PIN
Clave segur.
B
P
D
R
G
U
Nmero
Minsculas
Borrar
Completado
Buscar
Ad-hoc
3/9
sson
jee
AP_1
Ap_2
PBC
PIN
Sin seguridad
Espaol - 34
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 34
2009-03-30 2:23:49
Ad-hoc: No puede conectarse a un dispositivo mvil sin punto de acceso a travs del adaptador de LAN inalmbrica de
Samsung mediante una red par a par.
No
: Config. automtica
Prueba de red
: AP1
Direccin IP
Mscara de subred
Puerta de enlace
Servidor DNS
:
:
: Config. manual
Prueba de red
: AP1
Direccin IP
Mscara de subred
Puerta de enlace
Servidor DNS
Espaol - 35
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 35
2009-03-30 2:23:49
ENTRADA / AYUDA
Men de entrada
Lista de Entradas
Entrada
selo para seleccionar TV u otras fuentes de entrada externas como reproductores de DVD/
Blu-ray o receptores
de cable o satlite (decodificadores), conectados al televisor. Permite seleccionar la fuente de
entrada que se prefiera.
O Pulse el botn SOURCE del mando a distancia para ver una fuente de seal externa.
Lista de Entradas
Editar Nombre
Lista de Entradas
TV
PC
: - - - -
AV
Componente
HDMI1/DVI
HDMI2
: - - - : - - - : - - - : - - - -
Actualizar T Herramientas
Editar Nombre
Video / DVD / Cable STB / Satlite STB / PVR STB / Receptor AV / Juego / Filmadora / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray
/ HD DvD / DMA
D un nombre al dispositivo conectado en las tomas de entrada; de esta manera ser ms fcil seleccionar el dispositivo de
entrada.
N Si un PC con una resolucin de 1920 x 1080 a 60 Hz se conecta al puerto HDMI IN 1(DvI), se debe configurar el modo
HDMI1/DvI como DvI PC en la opcin Editar Nombre del modo Entrada.
N Cuando se conecta un cable HDMI/DVI al puerto HDMI IN 1(DvI), se debe establecer el modo HDMI1/DvI como DvI o DvI
PC en Editar Nombre del modo de Entrada. En este caso, se necesita una conexin de sonido independiente.
Men de ayuda
Autodiagnstico
Soporte tcnico
Prueba de imagen
Si cree que tiene un problema con la imagen, efecte la prueba de imagen. Compruebe el
patrn del color en la pantalla para ver si persiste el problema.
S: Si no se muestra el patrn de prueba o hay ruido en el patrn de prueba, seleccione
S. Puede haber un problema en el televisor. Puede haber un problema en el televisor.
Pngase en contacto con el Centro de llamadas para recibir ayuda.
No: Si el patrn de prueba se muestra correctamente, seleccione No. Puede haber un
problema en el equipo externo. Compruebe las conexiones. Si el problema contina,
consulte el manual del usuario de los dispositivos externos.
Aviso legal
Autodiagnstico
Prueba de imagen
Prueba de sonido
Intensidad de Seal
U Mover E Ingresar R Regresar
Espaol - 6
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 36
2009-03-30 2:23:49
Prueba de sonido
Si cree que tiene un problema con el sonido, efecte la prueba de sonido. Puede comprobar el sonido reproduciendo el sonido de
una meloda incorporada a travs del televisor.
N Si no oye sonido a travs de los altavoces del televisor, antes de realizar la prueba de sonido compruebe que Seleccionar
altavoz est configurado como Altavoz de TV en el men Sonido.
N La meloda se debe or durante la prueba aunque Seleccionar altavoz est establecido en Altavoz externo o se haya
silenciado el sonido con el botn MUTE.
S: Si durante la prueba de sonido slo se oye sonido de un altavoz o no se oye sonido en ninguno, seleccione S. Puede
haber un problema en el televisor. Pngase en contacto con el Centro de llamadas para recibir ayuda.
No: Si desde los altavoces no se oye sonido, seleccione No. Puede haber un problema en el equipo externo. Compruebe las
conexiones. Si el problema contina, consulte el manual del usuario de los dispositivos externos.
Por USB
Inserte una unidad USB que contenga la actualizacin del firmware descargado de samsung.
com. No desconecte la alimentacin ni extraiga la unidad USB mientras se aplican las
actualizaciones. El televisor se apagar y se encender automticamente despus de
completar la actualizacin del firmware. Compruebe la versin del firmware despus de que
hayan terminado las actualizaciones (la nueva versin tendr un nmero superior a la anterior).
Cuando se actualiza el software, la configuracin del vdeo y audio que se haya efectuado
vuelve a la configuracin predeterminada (de fbrica). Es aconsejable anotar la configuracin
para recuperarla fcilmente despus de la actualizacin.
Unidad USB
2009/01/17_000001
Por USB
En lnea
Software alternativo
2009/01/16_000000
En lnea
Actualiza el Software usando Internet.
N Primero, configure la red. Para conocer el procedimiento detallado sobre cmo usar la Configuracin de red, consulte las
instrucciones de Configuracin de la red. (consulte la pginas 30~35)
N Si la conexin a Internet no funciona adecuadamente, se puede interrumpir; vuelva a intentar la descarga. Si el problema
persiste, haga la descarga mediante USB y lleve a cabo la actualizacin.
Gua de conexin HD
Este men presenta el mtodo de conexin que proporciona la mejor calidad de imagen en el televisor de alta definicin. Consulte
esta informacin cuando conecte dispositivos externos al televisor.
Espaol - 37
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 37
2009-03-30 2:23:49
Espaol - 38
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 38
2009-03-30 2:23:50
/
INFO
MEDIA.P
z, EXIT, TV
Funcin
Mover el cursor y seleccionar una opcin.
Seleccionar la opcin marcada. Mientras se est reproduciendo una presentacin de
diapositivas, una pelcula o un archivo de msica:
- Pulsando el botn ENTERE durante la reproduccin se hace una pausa en sta.
- Pulsando el botn ENTERE durante la reproduccin se reanuda sta.
Reproducir o interrumpir el archivo de presentacin de diapositivas, de pelcula o de msica.
Volver al men anterior.
Ejecutar diversas funciones desde los mens de fotos, msica y pelcula.
Detener el archivo de presentacin de diapositivas, msica o pelcula.
Saltar al grupo anterior/Saltar al grupo siguiente.
Mostrar informacin del archivo.
Salir del modo Media Play.
Detener el modo Media Play y volver al modo TV.
SUM
851.86MB/993.02MB libre
PHOTO
2. Pulse el botn o para seleccionar Media Play (USB) y, a continuacin, pulse
el botn ENTERE.
N Se muestra el men Media Play (USB).
Photo
SUM
Music
Movie
Dispositivo
Setup
R Regresar
O Pulse el botn MEDIA.P del mando a distancia para que se muestre el men
Media Play.
O Pulse el botn SOURCE del mando a distancia para ver la lista de fuentes.
Pulse el botn o para seleccionar USB.
3. Pulse el botn rojo y, a continuacin, o para seleccionar la memoria USB. Pulse el botn ENTERE.
N La funcin vara segn el dispositivo de memoria USB.
N El nombre del dispositivo USB seleccionado aparece en la parte inferior izquierda de la pantalla.
4. Pulse los botones o para seleccionar un icono (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup) y, a continuacin, pulse el botn
ENTERE.
N Para salir del modo Media Play, pulse el botn MEDIA.P del mando a distancia.
Espaol - 39
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 39
2009-03-30 2:23:50
Color
Carpeta
Preferencias
5/15
1231.jpg
1232.jpg
1233.jpg
Vista bsica
Fecha
Secuencia
Repr. grupo actual
Informacin
Retirar con seg
1234.jpg
1235.jpg
1236.jpg
1237.jpg
Dispositivo
Pantalla de visualizacin
Color
Carpeta
1Vista bsica
Preferencias
Fecha
2
5/15
1232.jpg
1233.jpg
1235.jpg
1234.jpg
1236.jpg
1237.jpg
3
6
SUM
Dispositivo
1Archivos selecc.
Vaya a Seccin de la lista de teclas de clasificacin, Seccin de la lista de grupos o Seccin de la lista de archivos con los
botones arriba/abajo. Despus de seleccionar una seccin, pulse el botn o para seleccionar un elemento.
1 Tecla de clasificacin actual: Este campo muestra la norma actual de la clasificacin de archivos. Pulse el botn o para
cambiar la norma de clasificacin de archivos.
2 Ver grupos: Muestra en detalle los grupos de archivos clasificados de acuerdo con la tecla de clasificacin seleccionada. El
grupo de clasificacin que incluye el archivo seleccionado se resalta.
3 Archivo actualmente seleccionado: Slo se puede controlar el archivo seleccionado. Los archivos de fotos y pelculas se
muestran como miniaturas.
4 Dispositivo actual: Muestra el nombre del dispositivo actualmente seleccionado. Pulse el botn rojo para seleccionar un
dispositivo.
Botn rojo (Dispositivo): Selecciona un dispositivo conectado.
5 Elementos de ayuda
Botn verde (conf fav): Cambia la configuracin de favorito del archivo seleccionado. Pulse este botn varias veces
hasta que se muestre el valor que desee.
Botn amarillo (Seleccin): Selecciona un archivo en la lista de archivos. Los archivos seleccionados se marcan con un
smbolo c. Vuelva a pulsar el botn amarillo para cancelar la seleccin del archivo.
TOOLS (Herramientas): Muestra los mens de opciones. (El men de opciones cambia de acuerdo con el estado
actual.)
6 Informacin de seleccin del elemento: Muestra el nmero de archivos que se han seleccionado mediante la pulsacin del
botn amarillo.
Espaol - 40
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 40
2009-03-30 2:23:53
Carpeta
Preferencias
Vista bsica
Fecha
5/15
1231.jpg
SUM
1232.jpg
1233.jpg
Dispositivo
1234.jpg
1235.jpg
1236.jpg
1237.jpg
Vista bsica
Muestra las carpetas del dispositivo de memoria USB. Si selecciona una carpeta y pulsa el botn ENTERE, slo se muestran
los archivos de fotos incluidos en la carpeta seleccionada.
N Cuando se clasifican segn la Vista bsica, no se pueden configurar los archivos favoritos.
Fecha
Ordena las fotos por fecha. Ordena por aos y meses empezando por las ms antiguas.
Color Rojo / Amarillo / Verde / Azul / Magenta / Negro / Gris / Sin clasificar
Ordena las fotos por color. Puede cambiar la informacin del color de la foto.
N Debe activar Usar vista color en el men Setup antes de ordenar las fotos por color.
Carpeta
Ordena las fotos por carpeta. Si hay varias carpetas en el USB, los archivos de fotos se muestran ordenados en cada carpeta. El
archivo de fotos de la carpeta raz se muestra primero y los otros se muestran ordenados alfabticamente por nombre.
Espaol - 41
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 41
2009-03-30 2:23:54
Carpeta Preferencias
Color
5/15
1231.jpg
SUM
1232.jpg
1233.jpg
Dispositivo
1234.jpg
Secuencia
Repr. grupo actual
Copiar grupo actual
Informacin
1236.jpg
1235.jpg con seg
Retirar
1237.jpg
Secuencia
Con este men puede realizar una presentacin de diapositivas de los archivos de fotos del dispositivo de memoria USB.
Informacin
Se muestra la informacin del archivo de foto: nombre, tamao, resolucin, fecha de modificacin y ruta.
N Se puede ver la informacin de los archivos de fotos durante la presentacin
siguiendo el mismo procedimiento.
O Pulse el botn INFO para ver la informacin.
Espaol - 42
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 42
2009-03-30 2:23:55
Color
Carpeta
Botn
ENTERE
/
TOOLS
Vista bsica
1231.jpg
1232.jpg
1233.jpg
1235.jpg
1234.jpg
1237.jpg
E Pausa Ant./Sig.
SUM
1236.jpg
Dispositivo
Normal
Fecha
Secuencia
Repr. grupo actual
Informacin
Retirar con seg
5/15
SUM
Preferencias
T Herramientas R Regresar
Funcin
Reproducir/hacer una pausa en la presentacin.
Reproducir la presentacin.
Hacer una pausa en la presentacin.
Salir de la presentacin y volver a la lista de fotos.
Cambiar la velocidad de la reproduccin de la
presentacin.
Ejecutar varias funciones de los mens de fotos.
Color
Carpeta
Preferencias
Otra posibilidad
Fecha
5/15
Vista bsica
1231.jpg
SUM
1232.jpg
1233.jpg
Dispositivo
1234.jpg
1235.jpg
1236.jpg
1237.jpg
Espaol - 43
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 43
2009-03-30 2:23:58
Otra posibilidad
1. En la seccin de la lista de archivos, pulse el botn amarillo para seleccionar las fotos deseadas.
2. Pulse el botn TOOLS.
3. Pulse el botn o para seleccionar Secuencia y, a continuacin, pulse el botn ENTERE.
N Los archivos seleccionados se usan en la presentacin.
Herramientas
Detener visionado automtico
Veloc.vis.aut
Efecto de secuencia :
Normal
Fundido 1
Girar
Zoom
Msica de fondo
Configuracin de la imagen
Configuracin del sonido
Informacin
Efecto de secuencia
Puede seleccionar los efectos de transicin de pantalla que se utilizan en la presentacin.
Ninguno / Fundido 1 / Fundido 2 / Persiana / Espiral / Tablero / Lineal / Escaleras / Cortinilla / Al azar
N Esta funcin est disponible slo durante la presentacin.
Girar
Puede girar las fotos guardadas en el dispositivo de memoria USB.
N Con cada pulsacin del botn , la imagen gira 270, 180, 90 y 0.
N Con cada pulsacin del botn , la imagen gira 90, 180, 270 y 0.
N El archivo girado no se guarda.
Espaol - 44
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 44
2009-03-30 2:23:59
Zoom
Puede ampliar las fotos guardadas en el dispositivo de memoria USB. (x1 x2 x4)
N Para mover una foto ampliada, pulse el botn ENTERE y, a continuacin, los botones ///. Tenga en cuenta que si
una imagen ampliada es menor que el tamao de la pantalla original, la funcin de cambio de ubicacin no est operativa.
N El archivo ampliado no se guarda.
Msica de fondo
Puede seleccionar una msica de fondo para la presentacin.
N Para usar esta funcin, en el dispositivo USB debe haber archivos de msica y fotos almacenados.
N Se deben cargar archivos de msica para acceder al modo BGM. Reproduzca los archivos de msica en la categora de
msica para cargarlos.
Estado anmico BGM Dinmico / Rtmico / Triste / Excitante / Tranquilo / Sin clasificar
Se reproducir como fondo la msica con el estilo seleccionado.
N Si configura Modo BGM como nimo, puede seleccionar un estilo.
Informacin
Se muestra la informacin del archivo de foto.
Espaol - 45
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 45
2009-03-30 2:23:59
Carpeta
Preferencias
Dinmico
Lies
SUM
Vista bsica
Ttulo
3/37
Glen Hans
Once Ost
2007
Soundtrack
Want Me
Way
Dispositivo
I Love You
HaHaHa
Gold
Shine
Vista bsica
Muestra las carpetas del dispositivo de memoria USB. Si selecciona una carpeta y pulsa el botn ENTERE, slo se muestran
los archivos de msica incluidos en la carpeta seleccionada.
N Cuando se clasifican segn la Vista bsica, no se pueden configurar los archivos favoritos.
Ttulo
Clasifica los ttulos de msica segn el smbolo, el nmero, alfabticamente y orden especial, y muestra el archivo de msica.
Artista
Ordena los archivos de msica por artista segn el smbolo, el nmero, alfabticamente y orden especial.
Gnero
Ordena los archivos de msica por gnero.
Carpeta
Ordena los archivos de msica por carpeta. Si hay varias carpetas en el USB, los archivos se muestran ordenados en cada
carpeta. El archivo de msica en la carpeta raz se muestra primero y los otros se muestran ordenados alfabticamente por
nombre.
Espaol - 46
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 46
2009-03-30 2:23:59
Gnero
Carpeta
Preferencias
Dinmico
Lies
3/37
Glen Hans
Once Ost
2007
Soundtrack
Want Me
SUM
Way
Dispositivo
I Love You
Vista bsica
Ttulo
Gold
Shine
Informacin
Se muestra la informacin del archivo de msica: nombre, tamao, fecha de modificacin y ruta.
N Puede ver la informacin de los archivos de msica al Repr. grupo actual con el
mismo procedimiento.
O Pulse el botn INFO para ver la informacin.
Espaol - 47
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 47
2009-03-30 2:24:00
Reproduccin de msica
Reproduccin de un archivo de msica
1. Pulse el botn para seleccionar la seccin de la lista de archivos.
2. Pulse el botn o para seleccionar el archivo de msica que desee.
I Love You
HaHaHa
TOOLS
Funcin
Reproducir/hacer una pausa en el archivo de msica.
Reproducir el archivo de msica.
Hacer una pausa en el archivo de msica.
Salir del modo de reproduccin y volver a la lista de msica.
Ejecutar varias funciones de los mens de msica.
Cuando todos los archivos de msica de la carpeta (o el archivo seleccionado) se repiten. Modo
rep. est Encendido.
Cuando todos los archivos de msica de la carpeta (o el archivo seleccionado) se reproducen una
vez. Modo rep. est Apagado.
Otra posibilidad
1 Seleccione una tecla de clasificacin y en la seccin de la lista de archivos seleccione los archivos del grupo que desee.
N Para ir al grupo anterior o siguiente, pulse el botn (REW) o (FF).
2. Pulse el botn TOOLS.
3. Pulse el botn o para seleccionar Repr. grupo actual y, a continuacin, pulse el botn ENTERE.
N Se reproducen los archivos de msica incluidos en el archivo seleccionado.
Espaol - 48
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 48
2009-03-30 2:24:00
Modo rep.
Encendido
Configuracin de la imagen
Informacin
Se muestra la informacin del archivo de msica.
Ttulo
Carpeta
Preferencias
Vista bsica
Fecha
5/15
1231.avi
SUM
1232.avi
1233.avi
Dispositivo
ABCD.avi
1235.avi
1236.avi
1237.avi
Vista bsica
Muestra las carpetas del dispositivo de memoria USB. Si selecciona una carpeta y pulsa el botn ENTERE, slo se muestran
los archivos de pelculas incluidos en la carpeta seleccionada.
N Cuando se clasifican segn la Vista bsica, no se pueden configurar los archivos favoritos.
Fecha
Ordena las pelculas por fecha. Ordena por aos y meses empezando por las pelculas ms antiguas.
Ttulo
Ordena y muestra los ttulos de pelculas segn el smbolo, el nmero, alfabticamente y orden especial.
Carpeta
Si hay varias carpetas en el USB, los archivos de pelcula se muestran ordenados en cada carpeta. El archivo de pelculas de la
carpeta raz se muestra primero y los otros se muestran ordenados alfabticamente por nombre.
Espaol - 49
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 49
2009-03-30 2:24:01
Carpeta
Preferencias
5/15
1231.avi
SUM
1232.avi
1233.avi
Dispositivo
ABCD.avi
Vista bsica
Fecha
1236.avi
1237.avi
Informacin
Se muestra la informacin del archivo de pelcula: nombre, tamao, fecha de
modificacin y ruta.
O Pulse el botn INFO para ver la informacin.
Espaol - 50
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 50
2009-03-30 2:24:02
Formato
XML
HTML
basado en cadenas
basado en cadenas
basado en cadenas
*.avi
Contenedor
AVI
Decodificador de vdeo
Cdec de audio
Resolucin
720x576
XviD
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
1920x1080
H.264 BP / MP / HP
MPEG4 SP / ASP
Motion JPEG
*.mkv
MKV
800x600
720x576
XviD
1920x1080
H.264 BP / MP / HP
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
Motion JPEG
XviD
H.264 BP / MP / HP
MPEG4 SP / ASP
*.mp4
*.3gp
ASF
MP4
(SMP4)
3GPP
*.vro
VRO
VOB
*.mpg
*.mpeg
PS
*.ts
*.tp
*.trp
VC1
H.264 BP / MP / HP
MPEG4 SP / ASP
XVID
H.264 BP / MP / HP
MPEG4 SP / ASP
MPEG2
MPEG1
MPEG1
MPEG2
MPEG2
TS
H.264
VC1
1920x1080
720x576
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
WMA
Motion JPEG
*.wmv
1920x1080
800x600
1920x1080
MPEG4 SP / ASP
*.asf
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
800x600
WMA
MP3
ADPCM
AAC
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
ADPCM
AAC
1920x1080
AC3
MPEG
LPCM
1920x1080
AC3
MPEG
PCM
1920x1080
AAC
MP3
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
Espaol - 51
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 51
2009-03-30 2:24:02
TOOLS
/
/
Funcin
Reproducir/hacer una pausa en el archivo de pelcula.
Reproducir el archivo de pelcula.
Hacer una pausa en el archivo de pelcula.
Ejecutar varias funciones de los mens de pelculas.
Salir del modo de reproduccin y volver a la lista de pelculas.
Saltar hacia adelante o hacia atrs en el archivo de pelcula.
Ir al principio o al final del archivo.
Reproducir el archivo a doble velocidad. Segn el archivo de pelcula, es posible que esta funcin
no se admita.
Otra posibilidad
1 Seleccione una tecla de clasificacin y en la seccin de la lista de archivos seleccione los archivos del grupo que desee.
N Para ir al grupo anterior o siguiente, pulse el botn (REW) o (FF).
2. Pulse el botn TOOLS.
3. Pulse el botn o para seleccionar Repr. grupo actual y, a continuacin, pulse el botn ENTERE.
N Se reproducen los archivos de pelculas del grupo de ordenacin, incluido el archivo seleccionado.
Espaol - 52
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 52
2009-03-30 2:24:02
Herramientas
Modo rep.
Encendido
Configuracin de la imagen
Configuracin del sonido
Imagen Tamao
Ajustar
Configuracin subttulo
Informacin
Retirar con seg
Imagen Tamao
Ajustar
Reproducir vdeo al tamao de la pantalla del televisor.
Original
Reproducir vdeo al tamao original.
Configuracin subttulo
Puede configurar los subttulos de la pelcula.
Sincronizacin subttulo
Puede ajustar la sincronizacin de los subttulos.
Reiniciar sincr.subttulo
Puede restablecer la sincronizacin ajustada de los subttulos.
Informacin
Se muestra la informacin del archivo de pelcula.
Espaol - 53
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 53
2009-03-30 2:24:02
851.86MB/993.02MB libre
SETUP
Photo
SUM
Music
Movie
Setup
e Salir
Dispositivo
Apagado
Recordatorio cont. pelc.
Encendido
Obtener cdigo de registro DivX VOD
Obtener cdigo de desactivacin DivX VOD
Tiempo ejec. protect. pant.
4 hr
Informacin
Retirar con seg
Si est activado, aumenta el tiempo de carga para la recopilacin de la
Informacin
Puede configurar que se muestre la informacin del dispositivo conectado.
Espaol - 54
BN68-02112C-Spa-2.indd 54
2009-03-31 11:49:15
ACERCA DE ANYNET+
Conexin de dispositivos Anynet+
Qu es Anynet+?
Anynet+ es una funcin que permite controlar todos los dispositivos de Samsung conectados que sean compatibles con Anynet+
con el mando a distancia del televisor Samsung. El sistema Anynet+ slo se puede usar con dispositivos de Samsung que
tengan la funcin Anynet+. Para asegurarse de que el dispositivo de Samsung tenga dicha funcin, compruebe si lleva el logotipo
Anynet+.
Cable
HDMI 1.
1. Conecte el terminal HDMI IN (1(DvI), 2, o 4) del televisor y el terminal HDMI OUT del dispositivo Anynet+ correspondiente
mediante un cable HDMI.
Dispositivo 1 Anynet+
Cine en casa
Cable
ptico
Dispositivo Anynet+
Dispositivo 4 Anynet+
1. Conecte el terminal HDMI IN (1(DvI), 2, o 4) del televisor y el terminal HDMI OUT del dispositivo Anynet+ correspondiente
mediante un cable HDMI.
2. Conecte el terminal HDMI IN del sistema Cine en casa y el terminal HDMI OUT del dispositivo Anynet+ correspondiente
mediante un cable HDMI.
N Conecte el cable ptico entre el terminal DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) del televisor y la entrada de audio digital del
sistema Cine en casa.
N Si se sigue la conexin anterior, la toma Optical slo produce la salida de 2 canales de audio. Slo oir sonido de los
altavoces frontales izquierdo y derecho y del subwoofer del sistema Cine en casa. Para escuchar el canal de audio 5.1,
conecte el terminal DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) del DVD/decodificador de satlite (es decir, dispositivo Anynet 1 o
2) directamente al amplificador o sistema Cine en casa, no al televisor.
N Conecte slo un sistema Cine en casa.
N Puede conectar un dispositivo Anynet+ mediante el cable HDMI 1.3. Algunos cables HDMI pueden no admitir las
funciones Anynet+.
N Anynet+ funciona cuando el dispositivo de AV que admite Anynet+ se encuentra en estado de espera o de encendido.
N Anynet+ admite hasta 12 dispositivos de AV en total. Tenga en cuenta que puede conectar hasta 3 dispositivos del mismo
tipo.
Espaol -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 55
2009-03-30 2:24:03
Configuracin de Anynet+
Configuracin
Aplicaciones
T Pulse el botn TOOLS para ver el men Herramientas. Tambin puede mostrar el men
Anynet+ seleccionando Herramientas Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC).
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
InfoLink
Configuracin
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
: Encendido
Apagado Automtico
: S
Configuracin
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
: Encendido
Apagado Automtico
: S
Ver TV
Lista Disp.
Grabando: DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Receptor: Apagado
Configuracin
Men Anynet+
El men Anynet+ cambia segn el tipo y el estado de los dispositivos Anynet+ conectados al televisor.
Men Anynet+
Ver TV
Lista Disp.
(nombre_dispositivo) MENU
(nombre_dispositivo) INFO
Grabando: (*grabador)
Detener grabacin: (*grabador)
Receptor
Descripcin
El modo Anynet+ cambia al modo de emisin de TV.
Muestra la lista de dispositivos de Anynet+.
Muestra los mens del dispositivo conectado. Por ejemplo, si se ha conectado un
grabador de DVD, se muestra el men del disco del grabador de DVD.
Por ejemplo, si se ha conectado un grabador de DVD, se muestra el men del disco del
grabador de DVD.
Inicia inmediatamente la grabacin en el grabador. (Slo est disponible en los
dispositivos que admiten la funcin de grabacin.)
Detiene la grabacin.
La reproduccin del sonido se efecta a travs del receptor.
N Cuando hay conectados varios dispositivos de grabacin, stos se muestran como (*grabador), pero si slo hay conectado un
dispositivo, ste se muestra como (*nombre_dispositivo).
Espaol - 56
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 56
2009-03-30 2:24:03
Dispositivo con
sintonizador incorporado
Dispositivo de audio
Estado de funcionamiento
Botones disponibles
Botones numricos
Botones //// ENTERE
Botones de colores / Botn EXIT
N La funcin Anynet+ slo es operativa cuando la fuente activa del mando a distancia del televisor est ajustada en TV.
N El botn funciona slo cuando la grabacin es posible.
N Los dispositivos Anynet+ no se pueden controlar con los botones del TV. Los dispositivos Anynet+ slo se pueden controlar
mediante el mando a distancia del televisor.
N El mando a distancia del televisor puede no funcionar en determinadas circunstancias. En ese caso, vuelva a seleccionar el
dispositivo Anynet+.
N Las funciones Anynet+ no estn operativas con los productos de otros fabricantes.
N El funcionamiento de , puede variar segn el dispositivo.
Grabacin
La grabadora de Samsung permite efectuar una grabacin de un programa de televisin.
1. Pulse el botn TOOLS. Pulse el botn ENTERE para seleccionar Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC).
2. Pulse el botn o para seleccionar la grabacin inmediata y, a continuacin pulse el
botn ENTERE. Comienza la grabacin.
N Cuando hay ms de un dispositivo de grabacin
Cuando hay varios dispositivos de grabacin conectados, stos se muestran en una
lista. Pulse el botn o para seleccionar un dispositivo de grabacin y pulse el
botn ENTERE. Comienza la grabacin.
N Si el dispositivo de grabacin no aparece, seleccione Lista Disp. y pulse el botn
rojo para buscar dispositivos
Ver TV
Lista Disp.
Grabando: DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Receptor: Apagado
Configuracin
Ver TV
Lista Disp.
Grabando: DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Receptor: Apagado
Configuracin
Espaol - 57
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 57
2009-03-30 2:24:03
En la pantalla aparece el
mensaje Conectando al
dispositivo Anynet+.
El dispositivo Anynet+ no
funciona.
El dispositivo conectado no se
muestra.
El programa de televisin no
se puede grabar.
El sonido del televisor no sale
a travs del receptor.
Posible solucin
Compruebe si el dispositivo es un dispositivo Anynet+. El sistema Anynet+ slo admite
dispositivos Anynet+.
Conecte slo un receptor (sistema Cine en casa).
Compruebe si el cable de alimentacin de Anynet+ est debidamente conectado.
Compruebe las conexiones de los cables de Video/Audio/HDMI 1.3 del dispositivo Anynet+.
Compruebe si Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) est activado en el men de configuracin de Anynet+.
Compruebe si el mando a distancia del televisor est en modo TV.
Compruebe si es un mando a distancia exclusivo para Anynet+.
Anynet+ no funciona en algunas situaciones. (Bsqueda de canales, funcionamiento de Media
Play, Plug & Play, etc.)
Cuando se conecta o se desconecta el cable HDMI 1.3, se han de buscar de nuevo los
dispositivos o volver a apagar y encender el televisor.
Compruebe si la funcin Anynet+ del dispositivo Anynet+ est activada.
Compruebe si el dispositivo Anynet+ est correctamente conectado al televisor y compruebe si
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) est establecido en Encendido en el men Anynet+ Configuracin.
Pulse el botn TV del mando a distancia del televisor para cambiar a TV. A continuacin pulse el
botn TOOLS para visualizar el men Anynet+ y seleccionar el men que desee.
Seleccione Ver TV en el men Anynet+.
Pulse el botn SOURCE del mando a distancia del TV y seleccione un dispositivo que no sea
Anynet+.
Pulse z, CH LIST, PRE-CH y FAV.CH para cambiar al modo TV. (Tenga en cuenta
que el botn de canal slo funciona cuando no hay ningn dispositivo Anynet+ con sintonizador
incorporado conectado.)
El mando a distancia no se puede utilizar cuando se est configurando Anynet+ o cambiando a
un modo de visualizacin.
Utilice el mando a distancia cuando haya terminado la configuracin de Anynet+ o el cambio al
modo de visualizacin.
No se puede usar la funcin de reproduccin mientras se efecta una conexin Plug & Play.
Compruebe si el dispositivo admite las funciones Anynet+.
Compruebe si el cable HDMI 1.3 est debidamente conectado.
Compruebe si Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) est establecido como Encendido en el men de
configuracin de Anynet+.
Vuelva a efectuar una bsqueda de dispositivos Anynet+.
Slo puede conectar un dispositivo Anynet+ mediante el cable HDMI 1.3. Algunos cables HDMI
pueden no admitir las funciones Anynet+.
Si se ha interrumpido por una situacin anormal como la desconexin del cable HDMI o el de
alimentacin o por un fallo en la corriente elctrica, deber repetir la bsqueda del dispositivo.
Compruebe la conexin de la toma de antena del dispositivo de grabacin.
Conecte el cable ptico entre el televisor y el receptor.
Espaol - 58
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 58
2009-03-30 2:24:03
InfoLink
Uso de InfoLink
Media Play (USB)
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Aplicaciones
Puede ver noticias y servicios de informacin financiera y meteorolgica mediante el uso del
servicio InfoLink de SAMSUNG.
N Para obtener ms informacin sobre cmo configurar la red, consulte 'Configuracin de la
red'. (consulte la pginas 30~35)
N La informacin proporcionada por USA TODAY a travs de InfoLink slo es para Estados
Unidos. No se distribuye informacin para otros pases.
InfoLink
Activacin de InfoLink
1. Pulse el botn MENU para ver el men en pantalla. Pulse el botn o para
seleccionar Aplicaciones y, a continuacin, pulse el botn ENTERE.
Tiempo
L Mover R Regresar
Tiempo
L Mover e Salir
Opcin
Configure la regin
3. Pulse el botn amarillo. Pulse los botones numricos del mando a distancia para
especificar el cdigo postal de la regin y pulse despus el botn ENTERE.
N Puede comprobar qu tiempo hace en la regin seleccionada.
E Selecc. R Regresar
Washington
59F
Espaol - 59
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 59
2009-03-30 2:24:04
L Mover e Salir
Opcin
News
Money
Politics
Life
Sports
World
E Selecc. R Regresar
3. Pulse el botn rojo mientras usa el servicio para cambiar la opcin del servicio Noticias.
News
Opcin
Mercados
L Mover e Salir
Valores favoritos
Resumen valores
Valores y noticias
3. Pulse el botn rojo mientras usa el servicio para cambiar la opcin del servicio Mercados.
4. Pulse el botn o para seleccionar la opcin de servicio Mercados y, a continuacin,
pulse el botn ENTERE.
Valores favoritos
Se muestra la informacin de los mercados favoritos. Puede configurar los mercados favoritos
si pulsa el botn amarillo.
Resumen valores
Dow Jones, NASDAQ y S&P 500 y se muestra el ndice completo, el total de subidas y bajadas y el %.
Valores y noticias
Se muestra la informacin de los mercados favoritos, los ndices Dow Jones, NASDAQ y S&P 500 y las noticias financieras.
N Cotizaciones burstiles demoradas al menos 15 minutos.
N Para salir del servicio Mercados, pulse el botn azul.
N Para salir del servicio InfoLink, pulse el botn EXIT.
c
c
A
AA
AAI
AAR
AAB
3/1844
Espaol - 60
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 60
2009-03-30 2:24:05
Configuracin de InfoLink
1. Pulse el botn INFO.L del mando a distancia.
Configuracin de InfoLink
Arranque automtico
Tiempo visualizacin
Tamao fuente
Color de fondo
Posicin de InfoLink
: Apagado
: 4 hr
: Normal
: Negro
Arranque automtico
Establece si se debe ejecutar InfoLink automticamente al encender el televisor. Puede seleccionar Apagado o Encendido.
Tiempo visualizacin
Establece el tiempo de visualizacin del servicio de noticias en la pantalla del televisor. Puede seleccionar 4 hr, 8 hr, 10 hr o
Siempre.
Tamao fuente
Puede seleccionar el tamao de la letra, Normal o Grande mediante el servicio InfoLink.
Color de fondo
Puede seleccionar el color de fondo del servicio InfoLink. El color se aplica a cada ventana del servicio, de la opcin y de la
configuracin.
Posicin de InfoLink
Puede establecer la posicin de cada servicio InfoLink en la pantalla. Puede elegir entre seis posiciones preseleccionadas de
InfoLink (Posicin 1 ~ Posicin 6).
Espaol - 61
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 61
2009-03-30 2:24:05
RECOMENDACIONES
Identificacin de problemas
Si cree que el televisor tiene un problema, compruebe primero esta lista de posibles problemas y soluciones. Si ninguno de los
consejos funciona, pngase en contacto con el centro de atencin al cliente de Samsung o llame al 1-800-SAMSUNG.
Problema
Posible solucin
Imagen deficiente.
Intente sintonizar otro canal. / Ajuste la antena. / Compruebe todas las conexiones de
cable.
La calidad de la imagen es
defectuosa.
El sonido es defectuoso.
El televisor no se enciende.
Compruebe que el cable de seal est conectado firmemente con las fuentes del PC.
Compruebe que los cables de los componentes estn conectados en los terminales
correctos.
Espaol - 62
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 62
2009-03-30 2:24:05
Problema
Posible solucin
Si el ajuste no es correcto, use la utilidad del ordenador para cambiar los ajustes de
pantalla.
El televisor admite funciones de visualizacin multiscan dentro del siguiente rango de
frecuencias:
- Frecuencia horizontal (kHz): 30~60
- Frecuencia vertical (Hz): 60~75
- ndice de barrido mximo del PC (a 60 Hz): 1920 x 1080
N El panel LED TFT utiliza un panel que consta de muchos pxeles de nfimo tamao (6 220 800) que requieren de una
tecnologa altamente sofisticada para su fabricacin. No obstante, puede que existan unos cuantos pxeles brillantes u
oscuros en la pantalla. Estos pxeles no influirn en el rendimiento del aparato.
Parte frontal
Espaol - 63
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 63
2009-03-30 2:24:07
1
2
Espaol - 64
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 64
2009-03-30 2:24:12
LED-TV
PDP-TV
LFD
pulgadas
Especificaciones
vESA (A * B)
19~22
100 x 100
23~29
200 x 100
30~40
200 x 200
46~55
400 x 400
57~70
800 x 400
80~
1400 x 800
42~50
400 x 400
58~63
600 x 400
70~
800 x 400
80~
1400 x 800
30~39
200 x 200
40~52
400 x 400
55~70
800 x 400
70~
1400 x 800
Tornillo estndar
Cantidad
M4
M6
M8
M8
M6
M8
No instale el equipo de montaje mural mientras el televisor est encendido. Se podra producir una descarga elctrica con riesgo de
causar lesiones personales.
Espaol - 6
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 65
2009-03-30 2:24:13
3
2
1
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Espaol - 66
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 66
2009-03-30 2:24:14
Precaucin: Tirar del televisor, empujarlo o colgarse de l puede provocar su cada. En especial, procure que los
nios no se cuelguen del televisor ni lo desestabilicen; ste podra caerse sobre ellos y causarles lesiones graves
o incluso la muerte. Siga las precauciones de seguridad del folleto de seguridad incluido con el producto. Para
mejorar la estabilidad instale un dispositivo antivuelco, como se explica a continuacin.
Soporte del
televisor
Tornillo 1 (M8xL19)
1. Quite el tornillo de la parte superior derecha de la cubierta posterior del televisor. Asegure el soporte al televisor apretando el
tornillo 1 en el orificio del televisor.
N Use slo los tornillos suministrados.
armario
2. Apriete firmemente los tornillos a la pared o el armario donde se va a instalar el televisor. Apriete firmemente el soporte
acoplado al televisor y los tornillos a la pared o el armario para que el televisor quede fijo.
N Adquiera por separado los tornillos que usar en la pared o el armario.
N Instale el televisor cerca de la pared para que no caiga.
N Cuando instale el televisor en la pared, asegure el cable nivelado respecto al suelo o inclinado hacia adelante por
motivos de seguridad.
N Compruebe que el cable no se afloje.
N Cuando desee mover el televisor, debe quitar, primero, el cable de conexin.
armario
armario
. Compruebe que todas las conexiones estn bien aseguradas. Comprubelas peridicamente para detectar cualquier signo
de fatiga o de fallo. Si tiene dudas sobre la seguridad de las conexiones, pngase en contacto con un instalador profesional.
Espaol - 67
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 67
2009-03-30 2:24:15
Especificaciones
Nombre del Modelo
UN32B6000
Tamao de pantalla
(Diagonal)
32 pulg
(31.5 pulgadas medidas diagonalmente)
Resolucin de PC
(ptima)
1920 x 1080 a 60 Hz
Sonido
(Salida)
Dimensiones (An x Pr x Al)
Sin el soporte
Con el soporte
10 W x 2
31.5 x 1.2 x 20.5 (pulgadas) / 799 x 29.9 x 520.9 (mm)
31.5 x 10.0 x 22.8 (pulgadas) / 799 x 255 x 579.9 (mm)
Peso
Sin el soporte
Con el soporte
Consideraciones medioambientales
Temperatura de funcionamiento
Humedad de funcionamiento
Temperatura de almacenamiento
Humedad de almacenamiento
Soporte giratorio
(izquierda/derecha)
-20 ~ 20
UN40B6000
Tamao de pantalla
(Diagonal)
40 pulg
(40.0 pulgadas medidas diagonalmente)
Resolucin de PC
(ptima)
1920 x 1080 a 60 Hz
Sonido
(Salida)
Dimensiones (An x Pr x Al)
Sin el soporte
Con el soporte
10 W x 2
38.7 x 1.2 x 24.8 (pulgadas) / 983 x 29.9 x 631 (mm)
38.7 x 10.0 x 27.1 (pulgadas) / 983 x 255 x 688 (mm)
Peso
Sin el soporte
Con el soporte
Consideraciones medioambientales
Temperatura de funcionamiento
Humedad de funcionamiento
Temperatura de almacenamiento
Humedad de almacenamiento
Soporte giratorio
(izquierda/derecha)
-20 ~ 20
Espaol - 68
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 68
2009-03-30 2:24:15
UN46B6000
Tamao de pantalla
(Diagonal)
46 pulg
(46.0 pulgadas medidas diagonalmente)
Resolucin de PC
(ptima)
1920 x 1080 a 60 Hz
Sonido
(Salida)
Dimensiones (An x Pr x Al)
Sin el soporte
Con el soporte
10W x 2
43.9 x 1.2 x 27.8 (pulgadas) / 1129 x 29.9 x 705 (mm)
43.9 x 10.8 x 30.0 (pulgadas) / 1129 x 275 x 763 (mm)
Peso
Sin el soporte
Con el soporte
Consideraciones medioambientales
Temperatura de funcionamiento
Humedad de funcionamiento
Temperatura de almacenamiento
Humedad de almacenamiento
Soporte giratorio
(izquierda/derecha)
-20 ~ 20
UN55B6000
Tamao de pantalla
(Diagonal)
55 pulg
(54.7 pulgadas medidas diagonalmente)
Resolucin de PC
(ptima)
1920 x 1080 a 60 Hz
Sonido
(Salida)
Dimensiones (An x Pr x Al)
Sin el soporte
Con el soporte
15 W x 2
51.5 x 1.2 x 32.1 (pulgadas) / 1307 x 29.9 x 815 (mm)
51.5 x 12.0 x 34.4 (pulgadas) / 1307 x 305 x 873 (mm)
Peso
Sin el soporte
Con el soporte
Consideraciones medioambientales
Temperatura de funcionamiento
Humedad de funcionamiento
Temperatura de almacenamiento
Humedad de almacenamiento
Soporte giratorio
(izquierda/derecha)
-20 ~ 20
Espaol - 69
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 69
2009-03-30 2:24:15
Dimensiones
UN32B6000
VISTA SUPERIOR
31.5
26.4
20.5
15.5
22.8
10.0
17.5
VISTA FRONTAL/VISTA LATERAL
7.9
(200 mm)
7.9 (200 mm)
VISTA POSTERIOR
NOTA: No todas las imgenes estn necesariamente a escala.
Algunas dimensiones pueden cambiar sin previo aviso. Consulte
las dimensiones antes de llevar a cabo la instalacin del
televisor. No se hace responsable de errores tipogrficos o de
impresin.
2009 Samsung Electronics America, Inc.
Espaol - 70
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 70
2009-03-30 2:24:16
UN40B6000
VISTA SUPERIOR
38.7
34.9
24.8
19.6
27.1
10.0
20.5
VISTA FRONTAL/VISTA LATERAL
7.9
(200 mm)
7.9 (200 mm)
VISTA POSTERIOR
NOTA: No todas las imgenes estn necesariamente a escala.
Algunas dimensiones pueden cambiar sin previo aviso. Consulte
las dimensiones antes de llevar a cabo la instalacin del
televisor. No se hace responsable de errores tipogrficos o de
impresin.
2009 Samsung Electronics America, Inc.
Espaol - 71
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 71
2009-03-30 2:24:16
UN46B6000
VISTA SUPERIOR
43.9
40.1
27.8
22.6
30.0
10.8
21.7
VISTA FRONTAL/VISTA LATERAL
15.7
(400 mm)
15.7 (400 mm)
VISTA POSTERIOR
NOTA: No todas las imgenes estn necesariamente a escala.
Algunas dimensiones pueden cambiar sin previo aviso. Consulte
las dimensiones antes de llevar a cabo la instalacin del
televisor. No se hace responsable de errores tipogrficos o de
impresin.
2009 Samsung Electronics America, Inc.
Espaol - 72
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 72
2009-03-30 2:24:16
UN55B6000
VISTA SUPERIOR
51.5
47.6
32.1
26.8
34.4
12.0
21.7
VISTA FRONTAL/VISTA LATERAL
15.7
(400 mm)
15.7 (400 mm)
VISTA POSTERIOR
NOTA: No todas las imgenes estn necesariamente a escala.
Algunas dimensiones pueden cambiar sin previo aviso. Consulte
las dimensiones antes de llevar a cabo la instalacin del
televisor. No se hace responsable de errores tipogrficos o de
impresin.
2009 Samsung Electronics America, Inc.
Espaol - 73
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 73
2009-03-30 2:24:16
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Spa.indb 74
2009-03-30 2:24:16
TLVISEUR DEL
Guide de lutilisateur
www.samsung.com/register
Modle
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 1
N de srie
2009-03-30 2:24:33
Afficher lcran DEL du tlviseur en format 4:3 pendant une longue priode peut laisser des traces de
bordures gauche, droite et au centre de lcran, cause de la diffrence dmission de lumire sur
lcran. La lecture d'un DVD ou l'utilisation d'une console de jeu peut avoir un effet similaire sur l'cran. Les
dommages qui prcdent ne sont pas couverts par la garantie.
Laffichage dimages fixes provenant de jeux vido et dordinateurs au-del dune certaine priode peut provoquer une
rmanence partielle. Pour viter cela, rduisez la luminosit et le contraste durant l'affichage d'images fixes.
2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Tous droits rservs.
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 1
2009-03-30 2:24:33
Connexions
Connexion d'antennes VHF et UHF................................................... 8
Connexion pour la cblodiffusion....................................................... 9
Affichage du panneau de branchement............................................ 10
Chane
Menu des canaux............................................................................. 13
Gestion des canaux.......................................................................... 14
IMAGE
Configuration du menu Image.......................................................... 16
Visionnement Image sur Image........................................................ 20
Utilisation du tlviseur comme cran PC........................................ 21
Configuration du tlviseur avec un PC........................................... 22
ANYNET+
Branchement dappareils Anynet+ . ................................................. 55
Configuration de la fonction Anynet+. .............................................. 56
Permutation entre appareils Anynet+ .............................................. 56
Enregistrement................................................................................. 57
coute par lintermdiaire dun rcepteur (chane de cinma maison)... 57
Dpannage de la fonction Anynet+.................................................. 58
InfoLink
Son
Configuration du menu Son.............................................................. 23
RECOMMANDATIONS
Dpannage....................................................................................... 62
Installation du support...................................................................... 63
Retrait du support............................................................................. 63
Disposition des cbles...................................................................... 64
Spcifications de lensemble dinstallation murale (VESA).............. 65
Prparation avant linstallation de lensemble de fixation murale..... 66
Utilisation du verrou antivol Kensington........................................... 66
Scurisation de lespace dinstallation.............................................. 66
Stabilisation du tlviseur par rapport au mur ou une armoire......... 67
Spcifications................................................................................... 68
Dimensions....................................................................................... 70
Franais
CONFIGURATION
Configuration du menu de configuration........................................... 25
Rglage de lhorloge......................................................................... 28
Connexion au rseau....................................................................... 30
Configuration du rseau................................................................... 33
Licence
TruSurround HD, SRS et le symbole
sont des marques de commerce de SRS Labs, Inc. La
technologie TruSurround HD est intgre sous licence de SRS Labs, Inc.
Fabriqu sous licence par Dolby Laboratories. Dolby et le symbole en forme de double D sont des
marques dposes de Dolby Laboratories.
Symboles
Appuyer
Remarque
Touche effleurement
TOOLS
Franais -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 1
2009-03-30 2:24:34
Accessoires
Tlcommande (BN59-00850A) et
piles (AAA x 2)
Chiffon de nettoyage
(BN63-01798B)
Carte de garantie /
Guide de scurit
Support porte-fil
(BN61-05491A)
Porte-fil (3ea)
(BN61-05373A)
Panneau arrire
(UN32B6000: BN63-05854A)
(UN40B6000: BN63-05654A)
(UN46B6000: BN63-05654A)
(UN55B6000: BN63-05654A)
(M8xL19)
(M4xL10)
Vis de support (X5)
(6003-000337)
UN32B6000, UN40B6000, UN46B6000
(M4xL12)
Vis de support (X4)
(6003-001003)
UN32B6000
N Assurez-vous que votre tlviseur DEL comprend les lments suivants. S'il en manque, communiquez avec votre dtaillant.
N La forme et la couleur des accessoires peuvent varier selon le modle.
Franais -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 2
2009-03-30 2:24:36
Franais -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 3
2009-03-30 2:24:37
Affichage de la tlcommande
N Vous pouvez utiliser la tlcommande une distance maximale du tlviseur denviron 7 m.
N Une lumire intense peut affecter le bon fonctionnement de la tlcommande.
N La couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du modle.
1 POWER : Permet de mettre le
tlviseur sous tension et hors
tension.
2 TV : Permet de slectionner
directement le mode TV.
3 TOUCHES NUMRIQUES : Ces
touches servent changer de
canal.
4 _: Appuyez sur cette touche
pour slectionner des canaux
supplmentaires (numriques)
diffuss par une mme station.
Par exemple, pour slectionner
le canal 54-3, appuyez sur
54, puis sur _ et sur 3.
5 CH LIST : Sert afficher la liste
des canaux l'cran.
6 TOOLS : Sert slectionner
rapidement les fonctions
frquemment utilises.
7 INFO.L: Appuyez ici pour utiliser
les services de nouvelles, de
cotes boursires et de prvisions
mtorologiques accessibles
grce au rseau Samsung.
8 TOUCHES DE COULEUR :
Appuyez sur ces touches dans
les menus Liste des canaux,
Media Play, etc.
9 SOURCE: Appuyez sur cette
touche pour afficher et choisir les
sources vido disponibles.
0 y : Appuyez sur cette
touche pour augmenter ou
rduire le volume.
! SRS: Appuyez sur cette touche
pour slectionner le mode SRS
TruSurround HD.
@ MEDIA.P: Appuyez sur cette
touche pour lire des fichiers
musicaux, des images et des
films.
4
5
^
&
*
)
7
8
9
0
!
@
c
d
e
f
#
$
Franais -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 4
2009-03-30 2:24:37
Touche MENU
Affiche le menu l'cran principal.
Touche RETURN
Permet de retourner au menu prcdent.
EXIT
Quitte le menu de lcran.
Image
2. Le menu principal apparat lcran. La partie gauche du menu comprend des icnes:
Image, Son, Chane, Configuration, Entre, Application, Support technique.
Mode
: Standard
Contre-jour
Contraste
Luminosit
Nettet
Couleur
Teinte (V/R)
Rglages avancs
:7
: 95
: 45
: 50
: 50
: V50/R50
Franais -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 5
2009-03-30 2:24:37
Mode
Image
: Standard
Contre-jour
: 7
Contraste
Luminosit
Nettet
Couleur
Teinte (V/R)
Rglages avancs
Options d'image
: 95
: 45
: 50
: 50
: V50/R50
Contre-jour
7
U Dpl. L Rglage E Intro. R Retour
Icne Aide
7. Appuyez sur ENTERE pour terminer la configuration. Appuyer sur la touche EXIT pour
quitter.
Franais -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 6
2009-03-30 2:24:38
: English
Configuration
1. Appuyez sur la touche MENU pour afficher le menu. Appuyez sur la touche ou pour
slectionner Configuration, puis sur ENTERE.
Prt Iemploi
Langue
Heure
Mode Jeu
BD Wise
Type de rseau
Rglage du rseau
V-Chip
: Franais
: Off
: On
: Cble
Franais -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 7
2009-03-30 2:24:38
Connexions
Connexion d'antennes VHF et UHF
Si votre antenne comporte un cble semblable celui de l'illustration de droite, reportez-vous
'Antennes avec cble bipolaire plat de 300 ', ci-dessous.
Si votre antenne est dote d'un cble semblable celui de l'illustration de droite, reportez-vous
la section 'Antenne quipe de cbles ronds 75 '.
Si vous avez deux antennes, voir 'Antennes VHF et UHF spares'.
ANT IN
UHF
VHF
ANT IN
Franais -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 8
2009-03-30 2:24:38
ANT IN
ANT IN
ANT OUT
ANT IN
Cble d'arrive
Arrire du
Sparateur
Interrupteur RF (A/B)
tlviseur
Cbloslecteur
Franais -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 9
2009-03-30 2:24:39
1
4
ou
ou
Rseau de cblodistribution
1 ENTRE DALIMENTATION
Sert brancher le cordon d'alimentation fourni.
N Selon le modle, lemplacement de l'ENTRE DALIMENTATION peut tre diffrent.
2 LAN
Branchez un cble LAN ce port pour tablir une connexion au rseau.
3 ANT IN
Sert brancher une antenne ou au service de cblodiffusion.
N Utilisez le cble d'antenne dont le diamtre ne dpasse pas 14 mm (0.55 po).
4 HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, 3, 4 / PC/DVI AUDIO IN
brancher la prise HDMI dun appareil dot dune sortie HDMI.
N Aucune connexion audio n'est ncessaire entre deux appareils HDMI.
N Utilisez un cble HDMI plus petit que 14 mm (0.55 po).
N Qu'est-ce que le mode HDMI?
HDMI ou (high-definition multimedia interface) est une interface permettant la transmission de signaux numriques
audio et vido l'aide d'un seul cble.
La diffrence entre les interfaces HDMI et DVI rside dans le fait qu'un appareil HDMI est plus petit et qu'il est dot
du composante de codage HDCP (High Bandwidth Digital Copy Protection).
N Le tlviseur peut n'mettre aucun son et les couleurs des images peuvent tre anormales lorsqu'un lecteur DVD/Bluray, un cbloslecteur ou un rcepteur satellite (botier dcodeur) comporte une version HDMI antrieure 1.3. Lorsque
vous branchez un cble HDMI dot d'une version antrieure et qu'aucun son n'est mis, branchez le cble HDMI la
prise HDMI IN 1(DVI) et les cbles audio aux prises PC/DVI AUDIO IN situes l'arrire du tlviseur. Le cas chant,
communiquez avec la socit qui a fourni le lecteur DVD/Blu-ray, le cbloslecteur ou le rcepteur satellite (botier
dcodeur) afin de confirmer la version HDMI, puis demandez une mise niveau.
N Les cbles HDMI autres que ceux de version 1.3 peuvent provoquer un papillotement ou une absence d'image.
N Utilisez la prise dentre HDMI IN 1(DVI) pour faire une connexion DVI vers un appareil externe. Utilisez un cble DVI
vers HDMI ou un adaptateur DVI-HDMI (DVI vers HDMI) pour la connexion vido et les prises PC/DVI AUDIO IN pour la
sortie audio. Il faut utiliser la prise dentre HDMI IN 1(DVI) dans le cas dun branchement au cble HDMI/DVI.
N Une connexion audio distincte doit tre effectue si vous effectuez une connexion par le biais de la prise DVI. Pour ce
faire, utilisez un cble mini-prise stro 3.5 mm/2RCA.
Franais - 10
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 10
2009-03-30 2:24:39
8
R
ou
G
5 VERROU KENSINGTON
Le verrou Kensington (en option) est un dispositif servant immobiliser un appareil dans un endroit public. Si vous souhaitez
utiliser un dispositif de verrouillage, communiquez avec le magasin o vous avez achet le tlviseur.
N L'emplacement du verrou Kensington peut varier en fonction du modle.
6 COMPONENT IN / AV IN
brancher une composante vido/audio.
La prise dentre de composante COMPONENT IN sert galement de prise dentre audio vido AV IN.
N Faites correspondre la couleur du connecteur celle de la prise au moment du branchement.
N Branchez le cble vido la prise COMPONENT IN [Y/VIDEO] et le cble audio aux prises audio droite et gauche
COMPONENT IN [R-AUDIO-L].
N Si le magntoscope est de type mono (non stro), il faut utiliser un connecteur en Y (non fourni) pour effectuer les
connexions aux prises d'entre audio droite et gauche du tlviseur. ll est galement possible de brancher le cble la
prise R . Si le magntoscope fonctionne en stro, deux cbles distincts doivent tre branchs.
N La couleur de la prise d'entre AV IN [Y/VIDEO] (vert) ne correspond pas la couleur du cble vido (jaune).
7 PC/DVI AUDIO IN
Brancher la prise de sortie audio du PC.
Entre audio DVI provenant dappareils externes.
8 PC IN
Se branche la prise de sortie vido du PC.
N Si votre ordinateur prend en charge le branchement HDMI, vous pouvez relier cette prise aux bornes HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2,
3 ou 4.
N Si votre ordinateur prend en charge un branchement DVI, vous pouvez relier cette prise la borne HDMI IN 1(DVI) /
PC/DVI AUDIO IN.
Franais - 11
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 11
2009-03-30 2:24:39
9
!
9 EX-LINK
Connecteur utilis des fins de rparation seulement.
0 USB1(HDD) / USB2
Connecteur pour les mises niveau de logiciels, Media Play, etc.
Vous pouvez vous connecter sans fil au rseau Samsung laide de ladaptateur LAN sans fil de Samsung (vendu
sparment).
N Pour les USB HDD, utilisez le port USB1(HDD).
N La mise sous tension du tlviseur lorsquun dispositif USB est branch pourrait endommager les fichiers enregistrs sur
le dispositif USB.
! AUDIO OUT
brancher aux prises dentre audio de votre amplificateur/chane de cinma maison.
N Utilisez le connecteur appropri pour le branchement (vendu sparment).
N Lorsquun amplificateur audio est branch aux prises de sortie gauche et droite AUDIO OUT: Baissez le volume du
tlviseur et rglez le volume laide de la commande de volume de lamplificateur.
@ DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
connecter un appareil audionumrique tel que le rcepteur de la chane de cinma maison.
N Lorsquune chane audionumrique est branche la prise DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL): baissez le volume du
tlviseur, puis rglez le volume l'aide de la commande de volume de la chane.
N La diffusion audio en 5.1 canaux est possible lorsque le tlviseur est raccord un appareil externe dot de cette
fonction audio.
N Lorsque le rcepteur de la chane de cinma maison est rgl marche, vous pouvez entendre le son provenant de la
prise optique du tlviseur. Lorsque le tlviseur met des signaux numriques (air), il transmet le son en 5.1 canaux au
rcepteur de la chane de cinma maison. Lorsque la source est un composant numrique, comme un lecteur DVD/Bluray, un cbloslecteur ou un rcepteur satellite (botier dcodeur), et que ce dernier est branch au tlviseur l'aide d'un
cble HDMI, le rcepteur de la chane de cinma maison ne fera entendre qu'un son en deux canaux. Si vous dsirez
entendre un son en 5.1 canaux, branchez la prise de sortie audio numrique du lecteur DVD/Blu-ray, cbloslecteur
ou rcepteur satellite (botier dcodeur) directement un amplificateur ou une chane de cinma maison, et non au
tlviseur.
Franais - 12
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 12
2009-03-30 2:24:40
Chane
Vous pouvez configurer divers rglages pour les cannaux du tlviseur grce aux fonctions telles que Prog. auto, Chane favorite
et Puissance signal.
Avant que votre tlviseur ne puisse commencer mmoriser les canaux disponibles, vous
devez spcifier le type de la source de signal branche au tlviseur (c'est--dire une antenne
ou le cble).
T Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Il est galement possible de
rgler lantenne en choisissant Outils Commuter sur Cble (ou Commuter sur Air).
Antenne
: Air
Prog. auto
Effacer les canaux brouills
Liste des canaux
Syn. Prcise
Prog. auto
Air : signal d'antenne de type air. / Cble : signal d'antenne de type cble. /
Auto : signaux d'antenne de type air et cble .
N Au moment de la slection du systme de cblodiffusion : Cette option choisit le systme de cblodiffusion. STD, HRC et IRC
dsignent diffrents systmes de cblodistribution. Communiquez avec votre cblodistributeur local pour dteminer le type de
systme de cble de votre rgion. La slection de la source de diffusion est maintenant termine.
N Une fois tous les canaux mmoriss, le tlviseur commence liminer les canaux brouills (Supprime les canaux brouills).
Puis le menu Auto program s'affiche de nouveau.
N Pour arrter la programmation automatique, appuyez sur ENTERE. Le message Arrter Prog. auto? s'affiche.
Slectionnez Oui en appuyant sur la touche ou , puis sur ENTERE.
Franais - 13
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 13
2009-03-30 2:24:40
Canaux ajouts
Affiche tous les canaux ajouts.
Canaux ajouts
Ce menu permet d'ajouter, de supprimer ou dfinir les canaux favoris et d'utiliser le tl-horaire
pour les diffusions numriques.
Air
Air
4 Air
4-2 * TV #8
8 Air
13 Air
13-1 * TV #3 Alices Adventures in Wonderland
Antenne
Zoom
Choisir T Outils
Favori
Affiche tous les canaux favoris.
O Pour slectionner les canaux favoris configurs, appuyez sur la touche FAV.CH de la tlcommande.
Menu d'options des listes de canaux (sous Tous les canaux, Canaux ajouts et Favori)
Ajouter / supprimer
Il est possible d'ajouter ou de supprimer un canal afin d'afficher seulement les canaux dsirs.
N Tous les canaux supprims sont affichs dans le menu Tous les canaux.
N Un canal affich en gris indique que celui-ci a t supprim.
N Le menu Ajouter ne s'affiche que pour les canaux supprims.
N Il est galement possible de supprimer un canal du menu Canaux ajouts ou Favori.
Air
Air
4 Air
Supprimer
Ajouter aux favoris
4-2 * TV #8
coute par minuterie
8 Air
Modifier le nom du canal
13 Air
Choisir tout
13-1 * TV #3 Alices Adventures
Prog. auto in Wonderland
Antenne
Zoom
Choisir T Outils
Franais - 14
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 14
2009-03-30 2:24:40
Prog. auto
Pour connatre les procdures dtailles relatives lutilisation de Prog. auto, consultez les instructions sous la rubrique Menu
des canaux. (voir page 13)
Information, modification
Slectionnez cette option pour modifier une rservation d'mission.
Annuler horaires
Slectionnez cette option pour annuler une rservation d'mission.
Information
Slectionnez cette option pour afficher une rservation d'mission.
(Il est galement possible de modifier l'information relative une mission.)
Choisir tout
Permet de slectionner toutes les missions rserves.
Air
1 / 1 / 2009
Antenne
Zoom
Franais - 15
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 15
2009-03-30 2:24:40
IMAGE
Vous pouvez configurer divers options d'image telles que le mode, le rapport de forme et les couleurs de limage afin de ladapter
vos prfrences.
Dynamique
Choisit l'image offrant une meilleure dfinition dans une pice claire.
Standard
Choisit la meilleure image possible dans un environnement normal.
Naturel
Slectionne une qualit dimage optimale qui rduit la fatigue visuelle.
N Naturel nest pas disponible en mode PC.
Movie
Choisit une dfinition d'image pour regarder des films dans une pice sombre.
Image
Vous pouvez choisir le type dimage qui correspond le mieux vos exigences.
T Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Il est galement possible de
rgler limage en choisissant Outils Image mode.
Mode
: Standard
Contre-jour
Contraste
Luminosit
Nettet
Couleur
Teinte (V/R)
Rglages avancs
:7
: 95
: 45
: 50
: 50
: V50/R50
Contre-jour
7
Le tlviseur offre plusieurs options de rglage de la qualit de limage.
Rglages avancs
Les nouveaux tlviseurs Samsung permettent d'effectuer des rglages d'image encore plus
prcis que les modles prcdents.
N Rglages avancs est offert dans les modes Standard ou Cinma.
N En mode PC, seules les fonctions Contraste dynam., Gamma, quilibrage du blanc
peuvent tre modifies parmi les lments de Rglages avancs.
Rglages avancs
Tonalit noire
: Off
Contraste dynam.
: Moyen
Gamma
:0
Espace couleur
: Standard
quilibrage du blanc
Ton chair
:0
: On
U Dpl. E Intro. R Retour
Franais - 16
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 16
2009-03-30 2:24:41
Gamma
Il est possible de rgler l'intensit des couleurs primaires (rouge, vert, bleu).
Espace couleur
L'espace couleur est une matrice compose des couleurs rouge, vert et bleu. Slectionnez votre espace couleur prfr pour
obtenir des couleurs les plus naturelles possibles.
Auto : Cet espace couleur s'ajuste automatiquement aux nuances naturelles en fonction des sources des programmes.
Standard : L'espace couleur natif offre des tons riches et pleins.
Personnel : Rgle la gamme des couleurs selon votre prfrence.
N Une modification de la valeur des rglages entrane un rafrachissement de lcran.
N Les rglages peuvent tre dfinis et mmoriss pour chacun des appareils externes branchs une entre du tlviseur.
Par exemple, si un lecteur DVD est branch la prise HDMI1 et quil est actuellement slectionn, les paramtres et les
rglages seront sauvegards pour le lecteur.
Couleur : Rouge, Vert, Bleu, Jaune, Cyan ou Magenta
N Couleur est accessible lorsque Espace couleur est rgl Personnel.
N Dans Couleur, vous pouvez rgler les valeurs RVB de la couleur choisie.
N Pour rtablir la valeur RVB paramtre, slectionnez Rgler.
Rouge : rgle le niveau de saturation du rouge de la couleur choisie.
Vert : rgle le niveau de saturation du vert de la couleur choisie.
Bleu : rgle le niveau de saturation du bleu de la couleur choisie.
Rgler : rtablit les valeurs par dfaut de lespace couleur.
quilibrage du blanc
Vous pouvez rgler la temprature de la couleur pour obtenir des couleurs d'image plus naturelles.
Dcal.-R: rgle la profondeur du rouge.
Dcal.-V: rgle la profondeur du vert.
Dcal.-B: rgle la profondeur du bleu.
Gain-R: rgle la luminosit du rouge.
Gain-V: rgle la luminosit du vert.
Gain-B: rgle la luminosit du bleu.
Rgler : L'quilibrage du blanc mis au point prcdemment sera ramen aux valeurs par dfaut.
Ton chair
Vous pouvez rehausser le ton chair (rose) de l'image.
N Une modification de la valeur des rglages entrane un rafrachissement de lcran.
xvYCC Off / On
Le fait de rgler le mode xvYCC marche augmente le dtail et lespace couleur pendant le visionnement de films depuis un
appareil externe (c.--d. un lecteur DVD) branch aux prises HDMI ou Composante IN.
N xvYCC est accessible lorsque le mode image est rgl sur Cinma et que la source dentre externe est rgle au mode
HDMI ou Composante.
Franais - 17
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 17
2009-03-30 2:24:41
Options d'image
N En mode PC, vous ne pouvez modifier que Nuance coul. et Format dans Options
d'image.
Options d'image
Nuance coul.
: Normal
Format
: 16:9
: Auto
Nv nr HDMI
: Normal
Mode Film
: Off
: Off
: Standard
U Dpl. E Intro. R Retour
Format
Il est possible de modifier la taille de l'image l'cran. Votre tlviseur offre plusieurs options de
format dcran, chacune tant conue pour fonctionner au mieux avec des types dentres vido particulires. Votre cbloslecteur
ou rcepteur satellite peut galement disposer de ses propres tailles d'cran. En rgle gnrale, toutefois, il est conseill d'utiliser
le mode 16:9, autant que possible.
O Il est possible d'appuyer rptition sur la touche P.SIZE de la tlcommande pour modifier la taille de l'image.
16:9 : Pour rgler l'image en mode 16:9.
Zoom1 : Permet d'agrandir la taille de l'image affiche l'cran.
Zoom2 : Agrandit davantage la taille de limage que Zoom1.
Format large : Augmente le facteur de forme de l'image pour qu'elle remplisse l'cran en entier.
4:3 : Rgle l'image en mode normal, c.--d. 4:3.
Plein cran : Utilisez cette fonction pour voir l'image en entier, sans coupure, durant l'entre de signaux HDMI (720p/1080i/
1080p), composantes (1080i/1080p) ou numriques (1080i).
16:9
16:9
Format large U Dpl.
Format large
Zoom1 U Dpl.
Zoom2 U Dpl.
Zoom1
Zoom2
4:3
Plein cran
4:3
Plein cran
N Lorsque le mode Double (, ) est rgl sur ISI, le paramtre Image Format ne peut pas tre rgl.
N Une rmanence d'image temporaire peut se produire si une image fixe est affiche l'cran pendant plus de deux heures.
N Aprs avoir slectionn Zoom1, Zoom2 ou Format large : appuyez sur la touche pour slectionner Position, puis sur
ENTERE. Appuyer sur la touche ou pour dplacer l'image vers le bas et le haut. Appuyez ensuite sur la touche
ENTERE. Appuyez sur la touche pour choisir Format, puis sur ENTERE. Appuyez sur la touche ou pour agrandir
ou rduire le format vertical de limage. Appuyez ensuite sur la touche ENTERE.
N Aprs avoir slectionn Plein cran en mode HDMI (1080i/1080p) ou Composante (1080i/1080p), il est possible que vous
deviez centrer l'image : appuyez sur la touche ou pour slectionner Position, puis sur ENTERE. Appuyez sur la
touche , , ou pour dplacer l'image.
Rgler : Appuyez sur la touche ou pour slectionner Rgler, puis sur ENTERE. Il est possible d'initialiser le
rglage.
N HD (Haute dfinition) : 16:9 - 1080i/1080p (1920x1080), 720p (1280x720)
N Les rglages peuvent tre dfinis et mmoriss pour chacun des appareils externes branchs une entre du tlviseur.
Source d'entre
ATV, AV, Composante (480i, 480p)
numrique (1080i), Composante (1080i, 1080p),
HDMI (720p, 1080i, 1080p)
PC
Image Format
16:9, Zoom1, Zoom2, 4:3
16:9, 4:3, Format large, Plein cran
16:9, 4:3
Franais - 18
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 18
2009-03-30 2:24:41
Auto Motion Plus 120Hz Off / Image claire / Standard / Lisse / Personnel / Dmo
limine la trane des scnes rapides trs animes afin de rendre limage plus claire.
N Si vous activez le mode Auto Motion Plus 120Hz, des parasites peuvent apparatre lcran. Le cas chant, rglez Auto
Motion Plus 120Hz sur Off.
Off: Dsactive Auto Motion Plus 120Hz off.
Image claire: Rgle Auto Motion Plus 120Hz sur minimum.
Standard : Rgle Auto Motion Plus 120Hz sur moyen.
Lisse: Rgle Auto Motion Plus 120Hz sur maximum.
Personnel : Rgle le niveau de rduction du flou et de leffet de saccade selon votre prfrence.
Rduction du flou: Rgle le niveau de rduction du flou des sources vido.
Rd. effet de flou: Rgle le niveau de rduction de leffet de saccade des sources vido pendant le visionnement dun
film.
Rgler : Rtablit les paramtres personnaliss.
Dmo: Affiche la diffrence entre lactivation et la dsactivation du mode Auto Motion Plus 120Hz.
Franais - 19
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 19
2009-03-30 2:24:41
Image principale
Composant
HDMI1/DVI, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4
PC
Configuration
Il est possible dutiliser la fonction ISI pour visionner simultanment le syntoniseur tl et une
source vido externe. Cet appareil est dot dun syntoniseur intgr qui ne permet pas la
fonction ISI dans le mme mode. Consulter la section Paramtres ISI ci-dessous pour les
dtails.
T Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Il est galement possible de
configurer le mode ISI en choisissant Outils ISI.
N Si vous choisissez le son de limage ISI, veuillez vous reporter la rubrique Configuration
du menu Son. (voir page 24)
N Paramtres ISI
Effet lumire
conomiseur nergie
: M. coute act.
: Off
ISI
Image secondaire
TV
N Quand la fonction V-Chip est active, le mode ISI ne peut pas tre utilis.
N Si vous mettez le tlviseur hors tension alors quil est en mode ISI, la fentre ISI ne saffichera pas la remise sous tension.
N Limage de la fentre ISI peut sembler lgrement anormale lorsque lcran principal est utilis pour un jeu ou le karaok.
ISI
ISI On / Off
Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver la fonction ISI.
Format / / /
Vous pouvez choisir le format de limage secondaire.
Position / / /
Vous pouvez choisir la position de limage ISI.
N En mode Double (, ), Position ne peut tre choisi.
Chane
Vous pouvez choisir le canal de lcran secondaire.
ISI
: On
Format
Position
Air/cble
: Air
Chane
: Air 3
Franais - 20
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 20
2009-03-30 2:24:41
Modes d'affichage
Si le signal du systme quivaut au mode de signal standard, l'cran se rgle automatiquement. Si le signal du systme ne
correspond pas au signal standard, rglez le mode en vous reportant, le cas chant, au mode demploi de la carte vido; sinon,
limage pourrait ne pas apparatre. Pour les modes daffichage de la page suivante, limage de lcran a t optimise en usine.
Rsolution
IBM
640 x 350
720 x 400
640 x 480
832 x 624
1152 x 870
720 x 576
1152 x 864
1280 x 720
1280 x 720
1280 x 960
640 x 480
640 x 480
640 x 480
800 x 600
800 x 600
800 x 600
1024 x 768
1024 x 768
1024 x 768
1152 x 864
1280 x 1024
1280 x 1024
1280 x 800
1280 x 800
1280 x 960
1360 x 768
1440 x 900
1440 x 900
1680 x 1050
1280 x 720
1280 x 1024
MAC
VESA CVT
VESA DMT
VESA GTF
VESA DMT /
DTV CEA
1920 x 1080p
60.000
Frquence d'horloge
des pixels (MHz)
25.175
28.322
30.240
57.284
100.000
32.750
81.750
74.500
95.750
130.000
25.175
31.500
31.500
40.000
50.000
49.500
65.000
75.000
78.750
108.000
108.000
135.000
83.500
106.500
108.000
85.500
106.500
136.750
146.250
89.040
128.943
Polarit
synchro (H/V)
+/-/+
-/-/-/-/+
-/+
-/+
-/+
-/+
-/-/-/+/+
+/+
+/+
-/-/+/+
+/+
+/+
+/+
-/+
-/+
+/+
+/+
-/+
-/+
-/+
-/+
-/-
148.500
+/+
Franais - 21
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 21
2009-03-30 2:24:41
Rglage Auto
Image
Utilisez la fonction Rglage Auto afin que le tlviseur rgle automatiquement les signaux
vido qu'il reoit. Cette fonction rgle galement automatiquement les paramtres, les
frquences et les positions.
T Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Il est galement possible de
rgler l'ajustement automatique en choisissant Outils Rglage Auto.
N Cette fonction nest pas disponible en mode numrique DVI.
Luminosit
Nettet
: 45
: 50
Rglage Auto
cran
Rglages avancs
Options d'image
Rinitialisation de l'image
cran
Grain / Affin
Le but du rglage de la qualit de l'image est d'liminer ou de rduire le bruit de l'image. Si le
bruit n'est pas limin en effectuant uniquement une syntonisation fine, rglez la frquence le
mieux possible (Grain), puis procdez une syntonisation de nouveau. Une fois le bruit rduit,
rajustez l'image pour la centrer sur l'cran.
Position de l'ordinateur
Rgler la position de l'cran de l'ordinateur s'il ne correspond pas celui du tlviseur. Appuyez
sur la touche ou pour rgler la position verticale. Appuyez sur la touche ou pour
rgler la position horizontale.
cran
Grain
50
Affin
Position de l'ordinateur
Rtablir l'image
Rtablir l'image
Vous pouvez remplacer tous les paramtres d'image par les valeurs par dfaut.
Franais - 22
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 22
2009-03-30 2:24:42
Son
Vous pouvez choisir les rglages pour le mode sonore, le volume, les options sonores multipistes, etc.
T Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Il est galement possible de
rgler le son en choisissant Outils Son Mode.
Standard : Choisit le mode sonore normal.
Musique : Accentue la musique par rapport aux dialogues.
Cinma : Offre le meilleur son pour les films.
Voix claire : Accentue les dialogues par rapport aux autres sons.
Personnel : Rtablit les rglages sonores personnaliss.
Mode
: Personnel
galiseur
SRS TruSurround HD
Langue privilgie
Multi-Track Sound
Volume auto
Slect. le haut-parleur
Slect. son
: Off
: Franais
: Mono
: Off
: Haut-parleur TV
: Principale
galiseur
Vous pouvez rgler les paramtres audio selon vos prfrences personnelles.
Mode: Choisit le mode sonore parmi des rglages prdfinis.
Balance G/D: Rgle la balance entre les haut-parleurs droit et gauche.
100Hz, 300Hz, 1KHz, 3KHz, 10KHz (Rglage de la largeur de bande) : Pour rgler le niveau des diffrentes frquences de
largeur de bande.
Rgler : Ramne tous les rglages de l'galisateur aux valeurs par dfaut.
Franais - 23
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 23
2009-03-30 2:24:42
Slect. le haut-parleur
Lorsque vous coutez un tlviseur branch une chane de cinma maison, coupez le son des haut-parleurs du tlviseur
afin d'entendre celui des haut-parleurs (externes) de la chane.
Haut-p. externe : Permet d'entendre le son partir des haut-parleurs externes (chane de cinma maison).
Haut-parleur TV : Permet d'entendre le son partir des haut-parleurs du tlviseur.
N Les touches de volume et MUTE ne fonctionnent pas lorsque la fonction Slect. le haut-parleur est rgle Haut-p.
externe. Veuillez rgler le volume de votre chane de cinma maison.
N Si vous choisissez Haut-p. externe dans le menu Slect. le haut-parleur, les rglages du son seront limits.
Haut-parleurs internes du tlviseur
Haut-parleur TV
Haut-p. externe
Aucun signal vido
Rinitialisation du son
Choisir les options de rtablissement du son.
Rinitial. tout
Effacer
Franais - 24
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 24
2009-03-30 2:24:42
CONFIGURATION
Vous pouvez rgler des fonctions supplmentaires.
Heure
Pour les procdures dtailles concernant les options de configuration, veuillez consulter les
instructions Rglage de lhorloge . (voir pages 28~29)
Configuration
Langue
Heure
Mode Jeu
BD Wise
Type de rseau
Rglage du rseau
V-Chip
Sous-titres
: Franais
: Off
: On
: Cble
En branchant une console de jeu, comme une PlayStation ou une Xbox, vous pouvez vivre une exprience de jeu plus
raliste en slectionnant le menu jeu.
N Restrictions en mode Jeu (attention)
Pour dbrancher la console de jeu et brancher un autre appareil externe, dsactivez le mode Jeu dans le menu de
configuration.
Si vous affichez le menu TV en mode Jeu, l'cran tremblera lgrement.
N Mode Jeu n'est pas disponible en mode TV et PC standard.
N Lorsque la fonction ISI est active, la fonction Mode Jeu ne peut pas tre utilise.
N Si la qualit de l'image est mauvaise lorsqu'un dispositif externe est branch au tlviseur, vrifier si le Mode Jeu est On.
Dfinissez le Mode Jeu sur Off et connectez des priphriques externes.
N Si le Mode Jeu est sur marche :
Le mode image passe automatiquement Standard et il ne peut pas tre chang.
Le mode sonore passe automatiquement Personnel et il ne peut pas tre chang. Rglez le son l'aide de l'galiseur.
La fonction Rinitialisation du son est active. Le fait de choisir la fonction de rinitialisation aprs avoir paramtr
lgaliseur le ramne aux valeurs par dfaut.
BD Wise Off / On
Cette option offre une qualit dimage optimale pour les produits Samsung DVD, Blu-ray et chanes de cinma maison prenant en
charge BDWise. En les branchant au tlviseur Samsung, vous obtiendrez une image dune qualit plus riche.
N Branchez des produits Samsung BDWise laide dun cble HDMI.
N Lorsque le BD Wise est On, le mode image passe automatiquement la rsolution optimale.
N BD Wise est accessible en mode HDMI.
V-Chip
La fonction V-Chip exclut automatiquement les programmes qui sont considrs comme inappropris pour les enfants. Lutilisateur
doit entrer un NIP (numro didentification personnel) avant de pouvoir configurer ou modifier les restrictions de la fonction V-Chip.
N V-Chip n'est pas disponible en mode HDMI, Composante ou PC.
N Le code NIP par dfaut d'un nouveau tlviseur est 0-0-0-0 .
N Perm. tout: Dverrouille toutes les classifications du tlviseur. / Bloq. tout : Verrouille toutes les classifications du tlviseur.
Changer NIP
L'cran Changer NIP s'affiche. Choisissez un code NIP quatre chiffres et saisissez-le. Lorsque vous avez entr le code NIP
quatre chiffres, l'cran Confirmer NIP apparat. Saisissez de nouveau les quatre chiffres. Lorsque l'cran de confirmation
disparat, votre code NIP est mmoris.
N Si vous avez oubli votre code NIP, appuyez sur les touches de la tlcommande dans l'ordre suivant pour rtablir le code
0-0-0-0 : POWER (Arrt) MUTE 8 2 4 POWER (Marche).
Franais - 25
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 25
2009-03-30 2:24:42
Cont. paren. TV
Vous pouvez bloquez des missions selon leur classification. Cette fonction permet de
Cont. paren. TV
contrler ce que vos enfants regardent.
ALL FV V S L D
Perm. tout
TV-Y: Jeunes enfants / TV-Y7 : Enfants de plus de 7 ans / TV-G : Tout public/TV-PG:
TV-Y
Bloq. tout
TV-Y7
Surveillance parentale/TV-14: Tlspectateurs de plus de 14 ans / TV-MA: Public averti
TV-G
ALL : Blocage de toutes les classifications. / FV : Fantastique et violence / V: Violence /
TV-PG
S : Scnes de sexe / L: Langage adulte / D : Dialogue sexuellement explicite
TV-14
N La fonction V-Chip bloque automatiquement certaines catgories plus restrictives. Par
TV-MA
exemple, si vous bloquez la catgorie TV-Y, la catgorie TV-Y7 sera automatiquement
n Dpl. E Intro. R Retour
bloque. De la mme faon, si vous bloquez la catgorie TV-G, toutes les catgories du
groupe des jeunes adultes seront alors bloques (TV-G, TV-PG, TV-14 et TV-MA). Les
sous-classifications (D, L, S et V) sont regroupes de la mme faon.
N La fonction V-Chip bloque automatiquement certaines catgories qui sont plus restrictives . Par exemple, si vous bloquez
la sous-catgorie L de la catgorie TV-PG, les sous-catgories L de TV-14 et de TV-MA sont bloques automatiquement.
Classif. MPAA
Vous pouvez bloquer les films en fonction de la classification MPAA. La Motion Picture
Classif. MPAA
Association of America (MPAA) a tabli un systme de classification qui fournit aux parents ou
G
adultes exerant une surveillance des renseignements sur les films convenant aux enfants.
PG
Perm. tout
G : Tout public (aucune restriction).
PG-13
Bloq. tout
R
PG : Surveillance parentale recommande.
NC-17
PG-13 : Parents vivement mis en garde.
X
R : Avec restriction. Les enfants de moins de 17 ans doivent tre sous la surveillance d'un
NR
adulte.
n Dpl. E Intro. R Retour
NC-17 : Aucun enfant de moins de 17 ans.
X : Adultes uniquement.
NR : Pas de classification.
N La fonction V-Chip bloque automatiquement toutes les catgories qui sont plus restrictives . Par exemple, si vous bloquez
la catgorie PG-13, les catgories R, NC-17 et X seront automatiquement bloques.
Anglais canadien
C : missions destines aux enfants de moins de 8 ans.
C8+ : missions convenant gnralement aux enfants de 8 ans et plus, sans surveillance.
G : missions grand public convenant tous les auditoires.
PG : missions surveillance parentale.
14+ : missions dont la teneur peut ne pas convenir, en tout ou en partie, aux enfants de moins de 14 ans.
18+ : missions pour adultes.
N La fonction V-Chip bloque automatiquement toutes les catgories qui sont plus restrictives . Par exemple, si vous bloquez
la catgorie G, les catgories PG, 14+ et 18+ seront automatiquement bloques.
Franais canadien
G : Tout public.
8 ans+ : missions convenant gnralement aux enfants de 8 ans et plus, sans surveillance.
13 ans+ : missions pouvant ne pas convenir aux enfants de moins de 13 ans.
16 ans+ : missions ne convenant pas aux enfants de moins de 16 ans.
18 ans+ : missions rserves aux adultes.
N La fonction V-Chip bloque automatiquement toutes les catgories qui sont plus restrictives . Par exemple, si vous bloquez
la catgorie 8 ans+, les catgories 13 ans+, 16 ans+ et 18 ans+ seront automatiquement bloques.
Franais - 26
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 26
2009-03-30 2:24:42
1/2
Catg. amricaine tlchargeable est dsactiv.
Perm. tout
DH
N L'information sur le contrle parental est tlcharge automatiquement lorsqu'on regarde
Bloq. tout
MH
des canaux numriques. Cela peut prendre plusieurs secondes.
H
VH
N Le menu Catg. amricaine tlchargeable est disponible pour utilisation aprs
EH
tlchargement de linformation partir de la station de radiodiffusion. Toutefois, selon
l'information provenant de la station, il est possible qu'on ne puisse pas l'utiliser.
n Dpl. E Intro. R Retour
N Les niveaux de contrle parental diffrent selon la station de radiodiffusion. Le nom du
menu par dfaut et Downloadable US rating changent en fonction des donnes tlcharges.
N Mme si vous rglez laffichage lcran dans la langue souhaite, le menu Catg. amricaine tlchargeable saffiche en
anglais seulement.
N La classification bloque automatiquement certaines catgories plus restrictives.
N Les catgories (par exemple : Humor Level., etc.) et les niveaux de classification (par exemple : DH, MH, H, etc.) peuvent
diffrer selon la station de tldiffusion.
Comment rinitialiser le tlviseur lorsque la fonction V-Chip bloque un canal (solution durgence)
Si un canal accs restreint est syntonis, la fonction V-Chip le bloque. Lcran se vide et le
message suivant saffiche:
1. Entrez votre NIP. Appuyez ensuite sur les touches ou pour dsactiver
temporairement le blocage V-Chip.
N Si vous avez oubli votre code NIP, appuyez sur les touches de la tlcommande dans
l'ordre suivant pour rtablir le code 0-0-0-0 : POWER (Arrt) MUTE 8 2 4
POWER (Marche)
Chang
Entrez NIP
Sous-titres Off / On
Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver la fonction des sous-titres. Si la fonction des sous-titres n'est pas disponible, il n'y a pas
d'affichage l'cran.
O Appuyez sur la touche CC de la tlcommande pour rgler la fonction des sous-titres marche ou arrt.
N L'option Sous-titres ne fonctionne pas dans les modes Composante, HDMI ou PC.
Franais - 27
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 27
2009-03-30 2:24:43
N
N
N
N
N
Opacit arrire-plan: Cette option vous permet de choisir entre Par dfaut, Transparent, Translucide, Opaque et
Clignotant. Vous pouvez modifier l'opacit de l'arrire-plan des sous-titres.
Retour par dfaut : Cette option rtablit les paramtres par dfaut des fonctions suivantes : Format, Style de police,
Couleur d'avant-plan, Couleur d'arrire-plan, Opacit d'avant-plan et Opacit d'arrire-plan.
Options de sous-titrage numrique sont accessibles uniquement lorsque les options Par dfaut et Service1 ~ Service6
peuvent tre slectionnes en Mode ss-titres cods.
L'option de sous-titrage disponible dpend de l'mission diffuse.
Par dfaut correspond la configuration standard choisie par le diffuseur.
Lavant-plan et larrire plan ne peuvent pas tre configurs de la mme couleur.
Opacit avant-plan et Opacit arrire-plan ne peuvent pas tre tous deux rgls sur Transparent.
LED
ISI
Pour les procdures dtailles concernant la configuration des options, veuillez consulter la rubrique Visionnement Image sur
Image. (voir page 20)
Rglage de lhorloge
Horloge
Mode horloge
Vous pouvez rgler l'heure manuellement ou automatiquement.
Auto : Permet de rgler l'heure automatiquement en utilisant l'heure du signal de diffusion
numrique.
Manuel : Permet de rgler l'heure manuellement selon une heure particulire.
N En fonction de la station de diffusion et du signal, il est possible que la fonction de rglage
automatique de l'heure ne fonctionne pas correctement. Le cas chant, rglez l'horloge
manuellement.
N L'antenne ou le cble doit tre branch pour que le rglage automatiquement de l'horloge
se fasse.
Configuration
Le rglage de l'horloge est ncessaire pour pouvoir utiliser les diverses fonctions de minuterie
du tlviseur.
N L'heure s'affiche chaque fois que vous appuyez sur la touche INFO.
N Si vous dbranchez le cordon d'alimentation, vous devez rgler l'horloge de nouveau.
Prt Iemploi
Langue
: Franais
Heure
Mode Jeu
BD Wise
Type de rseau
Rglage du rseau
V-Chip
Sous-titres
Mlodie
: Off
: On
: Cble
: Moyen
Heure
Horloge
: -- : --
Mise en veille
: Off
Minuterie 1
: Dsactiv
Minuterie 2
: Dsactiv
Minuterie 3
: Dsactiv
Rglage Horloge
Il est possible de rgler l'heure manuellement.
N Cette fonction n'est disponible que lorsque la fonction Mode horloge est rgle Manuel.
N Vous pouvez rgler directement le mois, le jour, les heures et les minutes en appuyant sur les touches numriques de la
tlcommande.
Franais - 28
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 28
2009-03-30 2:24:43
Fuseau hor.
Choisissez votre fuseau horaire.
N Cette fonction n'est disponible que lorsque la fonction Mode horloge est rgle Auto.
Mise en veille
La mise en veille teint automatiquement le tlviseur aprs le dlai choisi (30, 60, 90, 120,
150 ou 180 min).
T Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Il est galement possible de
rgler la mise en veille en choisissant Outils Mise en veille.
N Pour dsactiver la fonction Mise en veille, slectionnez Off.
Minuterie 1
Mise en marche
00
00
am
00
00
am
Volume
10
Rpter
Dsactiver
Arrt
Source
TV
Antenne
Dsactiver
Chane
Air
Une fois
Trois rglages de minuterie (mise en marche/arrt) peuvent tre effectus. Il faut d'abord rgler
l'horloge.
Mise en marche
Slectionnez l'heure, les minutes, am/pm et activer/dsactiver. (Pour activer la minuterie avec le rglage choisi, rglez Activer.)
Arrt
Slectionnez l'heure, les minutes, am/pm et activer/dsactiver. (Pour activer la minuterie avec le rglage choisi, rglez Activer.)
Volume
Slectionner le niveau sonore dsir.
Source TV / USB
Vous pouvez choisir le contenu de la mmoire du tlviseur ou dun dispositif USB, lire au moment de la mise sous tension
automatique du tlviseur. Choisissez TV ou USB. (Veillez ce quun dispositif USB soit branch au tlviseur.)
N Il est impossible de crer un diaporama sil ny a quun seul fichier photo dans le dispositif USB.
Rpter
Choisir Une fois, chaque jour, Lun~Ven, Lun~Sam, Sam~Dim ou Manuel.
N Si vous choisissez l'option Manuel, appuyez sur la touche pour choisir le jour appropri de la semaine. Appuyez sur
ENTERE sur le jour voulu et la marque c s'affichera.
N Vous pouvez rgler les heures, les minutes et les canaux directement l'aide du pav numrique de la tlcommande.
N Mise hors tension automatique
Quand la minuterie marche est active, le tlviseur s'teint automatiquement au bout de trois heures aprs la mise sous
tension par la minuterie si aucune commande nest transmise au tlviseur.
Cette fonction est seulement disponible en mode Minuterie marche et vite toute surchauffe lorsque le tlviseur est sous
tension pendant une priode prolonge.
Franais - 29
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 29
2009-03-30 2:24:43
Connexion au rseau
Vous pouvez configurer le protocole Internet (IP) pour communiquer avec diffrents rseaux connects.
Modem externe
(ADSL/VDSL/cblodistribution)
2 Cble modem
1 Cble LAN
Cble modem
Routeur IP
Cble LAN
Cble LAN
Vous pouvez relier directement le port LAN au tlviseur, selon ltat de votre rseau.
Panneau arrire du tlviseur
Cble LAN
N Les bornes (le type de port et son emplacement) de lappareil externe peuvent varier selon la marque.
N Si lattribution de ladresse IP par le serveur DHCP a chou, mettez le modem externe hors tension, remettez-le sous tension
au bout de 10 secondes et ressayez.
N Pour les connexions entre le modem externe et le routeur, reportez-vous au mode demploi du produit correspondant.
N Le tlviseur peut tre connect directement au rseau LAN par lintermdiaire dun routeur.
N Il nest pas possible dutiliser un modem ADSL connexion manuelle parce quil ne prend pas en charge le protocole DHCP. Il
faut utiliser un modem ADSL connexion automatique.
Franais - 30
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 30
2009-03-30 2:24:43
1 Cble LAN
Routeur IP
Cble LAN
Cble LAN
N Les bornes (le type de port et son emplacement) de lappareil externe peuvent varier selon la marque.
N Si vous utilisez une adresse IP statique, le fournisseur daccs Internet vous transmettra ladresse IP, le masque de sousrseau, la passerelle et le DNS. Il faut entrer ces valeurs pour achever la configuration du rseau. Si elles ne sont pas
connues, informez-vous auprs de ladministrateur du rseau.
N Pour toute information sur la manire de configurer et de connecter un routeur, reportez-vous au mode demploi du produit
correspondant.
N Le tlviseur peut tre connect directement au rseau LAN par lintermdiaire dun routeur.
N Si vous utilisez un routeur IP qui prend en charge le protocole DHCP, configurez-le en mode DHCP ou adresse IP statique.
N Pour connatre les procdures dutilisation dune adresse IP statique, informez-vous auprs de votre fournisseur daccs
Internet.
Franais - 31
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 31
2009-03-30 2:24:44
ou
Routeur IP
sans fil
Cble LAN
1. Branchez ladaptateur sans fil LAN Samsung la borne USB1(HDD) ou USB2 du tlviseur.
N Pour utiliser un rseau sans fil, vous avez besoin de ladaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung (WIS09ABGN).
N Ladaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung est vendu sparment. Vous pouvez acheter l'adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung
WIS09ABGN chez un de nos dtaillants slectionns, dans les boutiques en ligne ou sur le site Samsungparts.com.
N Pour utiliser un rseau sans fil, le tlviseur doit tre connect un routeur IP sans fil. Si le routeur IP sans fil nest pas
compatible avec le mode DHCP, le tlviseur doit utiliser une adresse IP statique ou DHCP pour tablir la connexion au
rseau sans fil.
N L'adaptateur LAN sans fil de Samsung prend en charge IEEE 802.11A, IEEE 802.11B, IEEE 802.11G, IEEE 802.11N.
N Activez la fonction de connexion Ping si le routeur IP sans fil permet de lactiver et la dsactiver.
N Slectionnez un canal inutilis pour le routeur IP sans fil. Si ce canal est utilis par un autre appareil, il y aura des
interfrences et la communication pourrait chouer.
N Si un autre systme de scurit que ceux indiqus ci-dessous est appliqu, il ne fonctionnera pas sur le tlviseur.
Lapplication de la cl de scurit pour le routeur AP (routeur IP sans fil) est compatible uniquement avec les
paramtres suivants.
1) Mode dauthentification: OPEN, SHARED, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK
2) Type de cryptage: WEP, TKIP, AES
Lapplication de la cl de scurit pour le mode Ad hoc est compatible uniquement avec les paramtres suivants.
1) Mode dauthentification: SHARED, WPANONE
2) Type de cryptage: WEP, TKIP, AES
N Si votre AP prend en charge WPS (Configuration Wi-Fi protge), vous pouvez vous connecter au rseau laide de la
configuration par touches (PBC) ou dun NIP (numro didentification personnel (PIN)). WPS configurera automatiquemt
les cls SSID et WPA, peu importe le mode.
N Si l'appareil n'est pas certifi, il ne peut pas tre connect au tlviseur Samsung l'aide de l'adaptateur LAN sans fil de
Samsung.
Franais - 32
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 32
2009-03-30 2:24:44
Configuration du rseau
Type de rseau
Cble
Connexion au rseau laide dun cble.
Sans fil
Connexion au rseau sans fil.
Configuration
Mode Jeu
BD Wise
: Off
: On
Type de rseau
: Cble
Rglage du rseau
V-Chip
Sous-titres
Mlodie
Effet lumire
conomiseur nergie
ISI
: Moyen
: M. coute act.
: Off
Rglage du rseau
Configuration du rseau cbl (lorsque l'option Type de rseau est rgle Cble)
N Vrifiez si le cble LAN est branch.
Rglage pr. Internet Rglage autom. / Rglage manuel
Test du rseau: Il est possible de tester ou de confirmer ltat de la connexion rseau aprs avoir configur le rseau.
N Impossible de se connecter un rseau cbl
Si votre fournisseur Internet a enregistr ladresse MAC de lappareil utilis pour vous connecter Internet pour la premire
fois et procde lauthentification de ladresse MAC chaque fois que vous vous connectez Internet, il se peut que votre
tlviseur ne puisse pas se connecter Internet puisque son adresse MAC est diffrente de celle de lappareil (ordinateur).
Le cas chant, demandez votre fournisseur Internet la procdure suivre pour connecter dautres appareils (par exemple
le tlviseur) Internet. Si votre fournisseur Internet vous demande un mot de passe et un code dutilisateur pour vous
connecter Internet (ou un rseau), il se peut que le tlviseur ne puisse pas se connecter Internet. Le cas chant, vous
devez entrer votre code dutilisateur ou mot de passe pour la connexion Internet laide dun dispositif de partage de la
connexion Internet (routeur).
La connexion Internet peut chouer en raison dun problme avec le parefeu. Le cas chant, communiquez avec votre
fournisseur Internet. Si vous tes incapable de vous connecter Internet aprs avoir suivi toutes les procdures donnes par
votre fournisseur Internet, veuillez communiquer avec un centre de service Samsung Electronics au 1-800-SAMSUNG.
: Rglage autom.
Test du rseau
Adresse IP
Masque de sous-rseau
Passerelle
Serveur DNS
:
:
: Rglage manuel
Test du rseau
Adresse IP
Masque de sous-rseau
Passerelle
Serveur DNS
Franais - 33
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 33
2009-03-30 2:24:45
Si la Code de scurit est dj configure: Dans la liste des points daccs, choisissez
WPS.
N Vous pouvez choisir PBC, NIP, Code de scurit.
Numro
Supprimer
Effectu
Recherche
Ad-hoc
3/9
sson
jee
AP_1
Ap_2
PBC
NIP
Code de scurit
B
P
D
R
G
U
Numro
Bas casse
Supprimer
Effectu
Recherche
Ad-hoc
sson
jee
AP_1
Ap_2
3/9
PBC
NIP
Aucune scurit
Franais - 34
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 34
2009-03-30 2:24:46
Ad-Hoc: Vous pouvez brancher un appareil portatif sans point daccs laide de ladaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung, par
un rseau poste poste.
Oui
Non
: Rglage autom.
Test du rseau
Slectionnez un rseau
: AP1
Adresse IP
Masque de sous-rseau
Passerelle
Serveur DNS
:
:
Slectionnez un rseau
: Rglage manuel
: AP1
Adresse IP
Masque de sous-rseau
Passerelle
Serveur DNS
Test du rseau
Franais - 35
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 35
2009-03-30 2:24:46
Entre
Permet de slectionner le tlviseur ou d'autres sources dentre externes comme les lecteurs
DVD/Blu-ray, les cbloslecteur ou les rcepteurs satellite (botier dcodeur) connects au
tlviseur. Permet de slectionner la source d'entre de votre choix.
O Appuyez sur la touche SOURCE de la tlcommande pour afficher une source de signal
externe.
Liste source
Entrer le nom
Liste source
TV
PC
: - - - -
AV
Composant
HDMI1/DVI
HDMI2
: - - - : - - - : - - - : - - - -
Rafrachir T Outils
Entrer le nom
Magntoscope / DvD / Cble STB / Satellite STB / PvR STB / Rcepteur A/v / Jeu / Camscope / PC / DvI / DvI PC / Tv /
IPTv / Blu-ray / hD DvD / DMA
Entrez l'appareil connect aux prises d'entre pour vous faciliter la slection de la source d'entre.
N Lorsquun PC ayant une rsolution de 1920 x 1080@60Hz est branch au port dentre hDMI IN1(DvI), vous devez rgler le
mode hDMI1/DvI DvI PC dans l'option Entrer le nom du mode Entre.
N Lorsque vous branchez un cble HDMI/DVI dans le port hDMI IN 1(DvI), le rglage DvI ou DvI PC doit tre slectionn dans
loption Entrer le nom du mode Entre pour le mode hDMI1/DvI.
Support technique
Autodiagnostic
Support technique
Essai d'image
Si vous croyez qu'il y a un problme d'image, effectuez un essai d'image. Vrifiez le modle des
couleurs lcran pour voir si le problme persiste.
Oui : Si la mire ne saffiche pas ou sil y a du bruit dans la mire, slectionnez Oui. Il
est possible que votre tlviseur soit dfectueux. Communiquez avec le centre d'appel
Samsung pour obtenir de l'assistance.
Non : Si la mire s'affiche correctement, slectionnez Non. Il est possible qu'un appareil
externe soit dfectueux. Veuillez vrifier les connexions. Si le problme persiste, consultez
le guide d'utilisation de l'appareil externe.
Autodiagnostic
Autodiagnostic
Essai d'image
Essai de son
Puissance signal
U Dpl. E Intro. R Retour
franais - 6
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 36
2009-03-30 2:24:46
Essai de son
Si vous croyez qu'il y a un problme de son, effectuez un essai de son. Pour vrifier le son, vous pouvez faire jouer dans le
tlviseur une mlodie prenregistre.
N Si les haut-parleurs du tlviseur n'mettent aucun son, assurez-vous que le mode Slect. le haut-parleur est rgl Hautparleur TV dans le menu Son.
N Vous entendrez la mlodie durant l'essai mme si le mode Slect. le haut-parleur est rgl Haut-p. externe ou si vous
avez coup le son avec la touche MUTE.
Oui : Si, au cours de l'essai de son, un seul haut-parleur met du son ou si les deux haut-parleurs n'mettent aucun son,
slectionnez Oui. Il est possible que votre tlviseur soit dfectueux. Communiquez avec le centre d'appel Samsung pour
obtenir de l'assistance.
Non : Si les haut-parleurs mettent un son normal, slectionnez Non. Il est possible qu'un appareil externe soit dfectueux.
Veuillez vrifier les connexions. Si le problme persiste, consultez le guide d'utilisation de l'appareil externe.
USB
Insrez la cl USB contenant le microgiciel niveau tlcharg partir du site samsung.com
dans le tlviseur. Veillez ne pas interrompre l'alimentation ou retirer la cl USB pendant que
la procdure de mise niveau est en cours. Le tlviseur se mettra hors tension et redmarrera
automatiquement une fois la mise niveau termine. Veuillez vrifier la version du micrologiciel
une fois les mises jour termines (le numro de la nouvelle version sera suprieur celui de
lancienne). Au moment de la mise niveau du micrologiciel, les rglages vido et audio que
vous avez effectus seront remplacs par les rglages par dfaut (dfinis en usine). Nous vous
recommandons de prendre en note vos rglages afin de pouvoir les rtablir facilement aprs la
mise niveau.
ou
Cl USB
USB
2009/01/17_000001
En ligne
Autre logiciel
2009/01/16_000000
En ligne
Mises jour du logiciel par Internet.
N Configurez dabord votre rseau. Pour connatre le dtail de lutilisation de la fonction Rglage du rseau, consultez les
instructions sous la rubrique Configuration du rseau. (voir pages 30~35)
N Si votre connexion Internet ne fonctionne pas correctement la connexion peu tre interrompue. Veuillez tlcharger de
nouveau. Si le problme survient toujours, tlchargez la mise niveau sur une cl USB et effectuez ensuite la mise niveau
du micrologiciel.
Guide de connexion HD
Ce menu prsente la mthode de branchement qui permet d'obtenir la qualit optimale pour un tlviseur haute dfinition.
Reportez-vous cette rubrique lorsque vous branchez des appareils externes au tlviseur.
Contacter Samsung
Consultez cette rubrique lorsque votre tlviseur ne fonctionne pas correctement ou lorsque vous souhaitez mettre niveau le
logiciel. Vous pouvez consulter l'information concernant le centre d'appel, le produit ou la mthode de tlchargement du logiciel.
Franais - 37
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 37
2009-03-30 2:24:46
Franais - 38
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 38
2009-03-30 2:24:47
/
INFO
MEDIA.P
z, EXIT, TV
Fonctions
Permet de dplacer le curseur et de choisir un lment.
Slectionnez l'lment en surbrillance. En mode de lecture dun diaporama, dun film ou de
musique:
- Appuyer sur la touche ENTERE pendant la lecture la met en pause.
- Appuyer sur la touche ENTERE pendant la pause reprend la lecture.
Lire ou mettre en pause le diaporama, la musique ou le film.
Permet de retourner au menu prcdent.
Excuter diverses fonctions des menus Photo, Music et Movie.
Arrter le diaporama, la musique ou le film en cours.
Passer au groupe de classement prcdent ou suivant.
Afficher linformation sur le fichier.
Quitter le mode Media Play.
Arrter le mode Media Play et revenir au mode tlviseur.
SUM
851.86MB/993.02MB Gratuite
PHOTO
2. Appuyez sur la touche ou pour choisir Media Play (USB), puis sur la touche
ENTERE.
N Le menu Media Play (USB) saffiche.
Photo
SUM
Music
Appareil
Movie
Setup
R Retour
3. Appuyez sur la touche rouge, suivie de la touche ou , pour choisir la mmoire USB. Appuyez sur la touche ENTERE.
N Cette fonction varie selon de dispositif de mmoire USB utilis.
N Le nom du dispositif USB choisi saffiche dans l'angle infrieur gauche de lcran.
4. Appuyez sur la touche ou pour choisir une icne (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup), puis sur ENTERE.
N Pour quitter le mode Media Play, appuyez sur la touche MEDIA.P de la tlcommande.
Franais - 39
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 39
2009-03-30 2:24:47
Couleur
Dossier
P. prf.
2. Appuyez sur la touche ou pour choisir Supp. scurit, puis sur ENTERE.
3. Retirez le dispositif USB du tlviseur.
Aff. de base
5/15
1231.jpg
SUM
1232.jpg
1233.jpg
Appareil
1234.jpg
P. date
Diaporama
Lire groupe courant.
Information
Supp. scurit
1235.jpg
1236.jpg
1237.jpg
Affichage lcran
Couleur
Dossier
P. prf.
1 Aff. de base
P. date
2
5/15
1232.jpg
1233.jpg
1235.jpg
1234.jpg
1236.jpg
1237.jpg
3
6
SUM
Appareil
1 Fich. sl.
Passez la section Liste des cls de tri, Liste de groupe ou Liste des fichiers laide des flches verticales. Aprs avoir
choisi une section, appuyez sur la touche ou pour choisir un lment.
1 Cl de tri actuelle: Ce champ indique le critre de classement actuel des fichiers. Appuyez sur la touche ou pour
modifier le critre de classement des fichiers.
2 Affichage des groupes: Affiche les groupes dtaills ou les fichiers selon la cl de tri choisie. Le groupe de classement
comprenant le fichier slectionn est mis en surbrillance.
3 Fichier actuellement slectionn: Le fichier slectionn est le fichier que vous commandez. Les fichiers photo et film
saffichent sous forme de vignettes.
4 Dispositif actuel: Affiche le nom du dispositif slectionn. Appuyez sur la touche rouge pour choisir un dispositif.
Touche rouge (Appareil): Slectionne un dispositif branch.
5 lments daide
Touche verte (Rgl fav): Modifie le rglage favori du fichier slectionn. Appuyez sur cette touche rptition jusqu ce
que la valeur dsire saffiche.
Touche jaune (Choisir): Choisit un fichier dans la liste. Les fichiers slectionns sont marqus du symbole c. Appuyez
une fois de plus sur la touche jaune pour annuler votre choix.
TOOLS(Outils): Affiche les options de menu (les options de menu varient selon ltat actuel).
6 Information sur la slection d'lments : Affiche le nombre de fichiers slectionns l'aide de la touche jaune.
Franais - 40
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 40
2009-03-30 2:24:50
Dossier
P. prf.
Aff. de base
P. date
5/15
1231.jpg
1232.jpg
1233.jpg
1234.jpg
1235.jpg
1236.jpg
1237.jpg
Aff. de base
Affiche les dossiers du dispositif de mmoire USB. Lorsque vous choisissez un dossier et que vous appuyez sur la touche
ENTERE, seuls les fichiers photo du dossier choisi sont affichs.
N Il nest pas possible de rgler les fichiers favoris dans le classement Aff. de base.
P. date
Les photos sont classes par date. Elles sont classes par mois et par anne partir de la photo la plus rcente.
Couleur Rouge / Jaune / Vert / Bleu / Magenta / Noir / Gris / Non classs
Les photos sont classes par couleur. Il est possible de modifier linformation de couleur dune photo.
N Activez loption Utiliser laff. Couleur du menu Setup avant de classer les photos par couleur.
Dossier
Les photos sont classes par dossier. Sil y a beaucoup de dossiers dans le dispositif USB, les fichiers photo sont affichs dans
lordre, dans chaque dossier. Les fichiers photo du dossier racine est affich en premier et les autres dans lordre alphabtique,
par nom.
Franais - 41
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 41
2009-03-30 2:24:51
Couleur
5/15
1231.jpg
SUM
1232.jpg
1233.jpg
Appareil
1234.jpg
Dossier
P. prf.
Diaporama
Lire groupe courant.
Mod. info groupe
Information
1236.jpg 1237.jpg
1235.jpgscurit
Supp.
Diaporama
Ce menu permet de lire un diaporama cr laide des fichiers photo du dispositif de mmoire USB.
Information
Linformation du fichier photo, notamment le nom, la taille, la rsolution, la date de modification et le chemin, est affiche.
N Vous pouvez afficher linformation des fichiers photo pendant un diaporama,
laide de la mme procdure.
O Appuyez sur la touche INFO pour afficher linformation.
Supp. scurit
Il est possible de retirer le dispositif du tlviseur de faon sre.
Franais - 42
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 42
2009-03-30 2:24:52
Couleur
Dossier
P. prf.
5/15
1231.jpg
/
TOOLS
1232.jpg
SUM
1233.jpg
Diaporama
Lire groupe courant.
Information
Supp. scurit
1235.jpg
1234.jpg
1236.jpg
1237.jpg
Appareil
Normal
Fonctions
Lecture / pause du diaporama.
Lecture du diaporama.
Pause du diaporama.
Quitter le diaporama et retourner la liste des photos.
Modifier la vitesse de lecture du diaporama.
Excuter diverses fonctions des menus Photo.
P. date
Aff. de base
E Pause Prc/Suiv
SUM
T Outils R Retour
Couleur
Dossier
P. prf.
Aff. de base
P. date
5/15
1231.jpg
SUM
Ou encore
1232.jpg
1233.jpg
Appareil
1234.jpg
1235.jpg
1236.jpg
1237.jpg
1. Choisissez une cl de tri. Choisissez ensuite les photos du groupe dsir dans la
section Liste des fichiers.
N Pour passer au groupe prcdent ou suivant, appuyez sur la touche (REW) ou (FF).
2. Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS.
3. Appuyez sur la touche ou pour choisir Lire groupe courant., puis sur ENTERE.
N Toutes les photos du groupe de classement feront partie du diaporama.
Franais - 43
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 43
2009-03-30 2:24:55
Ou encore
1. Dans la section Liste des fichiers, appuyez sur la touche jaune pour choisir les photos dsires.
2. Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS.
3. Appuyez sur la touche ou pour choisir Diaporama, puis sur ENTERE.
N Les fichiers slectionns feront partie du diaporama.
Outils
Arrter le diaporama
Vitesse du diap.
Normal
Effet diaporama
Fondu1
Rotation
Zoom
Musique de fond
Rglage de l'image
Rglage du son
Information
Effet diaporama
Vous pouvez choisir leffet de transition lcran du diaporama.
Aucun / Fondu1 / Fondu2 / Masquer / Spirale / Damier / Linaire / Escaliers / Volet / Alatoire
N Cette fonction nest accessible que pendant un diaporama.
Rotation
Vous pouvez faire pivoter les photos enregistres sur un dispositif de mmoire USB.
N Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur la touche , limage pivote de 270, 180, 90 et 0.
N Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur la touche , limage pivote de 90, 180, 270 et 0.
N Le fichier pivot nest pas sauvegard.
Franais - 44
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 44
2009-03-30 2:24:56
Zoom
Vous pouvez agrandir les photos enregistres sur un dispositif de mmoire USB.
(x1 x2 x4)
N Pour dplacer la photo agrandie, appuyez sur la touche ENTERE, suivie des touches ///. Remarque: lorsque
limage agrandie est plus petite que sa taille originale lcran, le changement demplacement ne fonctionne pas.
N Le fichier agrandi nest pas sauvegard.
Musique de fond
Vous pouvez choisir la musique de fond en regardant un diaporama.
N Pour utiliser cette fonction, de la musique et des photos doivent tre sauvegards sur le dispositif USB.
N Le chargement des fichiers musicaux est ncessaire pour modifier le mode BGM. Lecture des fichiers musicaux dans la
catgorie charger.
Information
Linformation du fichier photo saffiche.
Supp. scurit
Il est possible de retirer le dispositif du tlviseur de faon sre.
Franais - 45
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 45
2009-03-30 2:24:56
P. prf.
Dossier
Aff. de base
Titre
Lies
3/37
Glen Hans
Once Ost
2007
Soundtrack
Want Me
Way
I Love You
HaHaHa
Gold
Shine
Aff. de base
Affiche les dossiers du dispositif de mmoire USB. Lorsque vous choisissez un dossier et que vous appuyez sur la touche
ENTERE, seuls les fichiers musicaux du dossier choisi sont affichs.
N Il nest pas possible de rgler les fichiers favoris dans le classement Aff. de base.
Titre
Les fichiers musicaux sont classs par ordre de symbole/numro/alphabtique/spcial et affichs.
P. artis.
Les fichiers musicaux sont classs par artiste, par ordre de symbole/numro/alphabtique/spcial.
Genre
Les fichiers musicaux sont classs par genre.
Dossier
Les fichiers musicaux sont classs par dossier. Sil y a beaucoup de dossiers dans le dispositif USB, les fichiers sont affichs
dans lordre dans chacun des dossiers. Le fichier musical dans le dossier source est affich en premier et les autres dans lordre
alphabtique par nom.
Franais - 46
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 46
2009-03-30 2:24:56
Genre
P. prf.
Dossier
Energetic
Lies
SUM
Aff. de base
3/37
Glen Hans
Once Ost
2007
Soundtrack
Want Me
Way
Appareil
I Love You
Titre
Gold
Shine
Information
Linformation du fichier musical, notamment le nom, la taille, la date de modification et le chemin d'accs, est affiche.
N Vous pouvez afficher linformation des fichiers musicaux pendant la Lire groupe
courant., laide de la mme marche suivre.
O Appuyez sur la touche INFO pour afficher linformation.
Supp. scurit
Il est possible de retirer le dispositif du tlviseur de faon sre.
Franais - 47
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 47
2009-03-30 2:24:56
Lecture musicale
Lecture dun fichier musical
1. Appuyez sur la touche pour slectionner la section Liste des fichiers.
2. Appuyez sur la touche ou pour slectionner le fichier musical lire.
I Love You
HaHaHa
TOOLS
Fonctions
Lecture/pause du fichier musical.
Lecture du fichier musical
Pause du fichier musical
Quitter le mode de lecture et revenir la liste de musique.
Excuter diverses fonctions du menu Musique.
Rpte la lecture de tous les fichiers musicaux (ou du fichier slectionn) dans le dossier. Modo
rep. rgl On.
Lecture unique de tous les fichiers musicaux (ou du fichier slectionn) dans le dossier. Modo rep.
rgl Off.
Ou encore
1. Choisissez une cl de tri. Choisissez ensuite les fichiers du groupe dsir dans la section Liste des fichiers.
N Pour passer au groupe prcdent ou suivant, appuyez sur la touche (REW) ou (FF).
2. Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS.
3. Appuyez sur la touche ou pour choisir Lire groupe courant., puis sur ENTERE.
N Les fichiers musicaux contenus dans le groupe de tri du fichier slectionn sont lus.
Franais - 48
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 48
2009-03-30 2:24:57
Modo rep.
On
Rglage de l'image
Rglage du son
Information
Supp. scurit
Information
Linformation du fichier musical saffiche.
Supp. scurit
Il est possible de retirer le dispositif du tlviseur de faon sre.
Titre
Dossier
P. prf.
Aff. de base
P. date
5/15
1231.avi
SUM
1232.avi
1233.avi
Appareil
ABCD.avi
1235.avi
1236.avi
1237.avi
Aff. de base
Affiche les dossiers du dispositif de mmoire USB. Lorsque vous choisissez un dossier et que vous appuyez sur la touche
ENTERE, seuls les fichiers film du dossier choisi sont affichs.
N Il nest pas possible de rgler les fichiers favoris dans le classement Aff. de base.
P. date
Les films sont classs par date. Ils sont classes par anne et par mois, partir du film le plus rcent.
Titre
Les films sont classs par titre, par ordre de symbole/numro/alphabtique/spcial.
Dossier
Sil y a beaucoup de dossiers dans le dispositif USB, les fichiers film sont affichs dans lordre, dans chaque dossier. Le fichier film
dans le dossier source est affich en premier et les autres le sont ensuite, par ordre alphabtique de nom.
Franais - 49
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 49
2009-03-30 2:24:58
Dossier
P. prf.
5/15
1231.avi
1232.avi
SUM
1233.avi
Appareil
ABCD.avi
P. date
Aff. de base
1236.avi
1237.avi
Information
Linformation du fichier film, notamment le nom, la taille, la date de modification et le
chemin d'accs, est affiche.
N Appuyez sur la touche INFO pour afficher linformation.
Supp. scurit
Il est possible de retirer le dispositif du tlviseur de faon sre.
ABC.avi
SUM
E Pause Saut
T Outils R Retour
Franais - 50
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 50
2009-03-30 2:24:59
Extension de fichier
.ttxt
.smi
.srt
.sub
.sub ou .txt
Format
XML
HTML
string-based
string-based
string-based
*.avi
Conteneur
AVI
Compression /
dcompression audio
Rsolution
720x576
XviD
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
1920x1080
Dcodeur vido
H.264 BP / MP / HP
MPEG4 SP / ASP
Motion JPEG
*.mkv
MKV
800x600
720x576
XviD
1920x1080
H.264 BP / MP / HP
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
Motion JPEG
XviD
H.264 BP / MP / HP
MPEG4 SP / ASP
*.mp4
*.3gp
ASF
MP4
(SMP4)
3GPP
*.vro
VRO
VOB
*.mpg
*.mpeg
PS
*.ts
*.tp
*.trp
VC1
H.264 BP / MP / HP
MPEG4 SP / ASP
XVID
H.264 BP / MP / HP
MPEG4 SP / ASP
MPEG2
MPEG1
MPEG1
MPEG2
MPEG2
TS
H.264
VC1
1920x1080
720x576
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
WMA
Motion JPEG
*.wmv
1920x1080
800x600
1920x1080
MPEG4 SP / ASP
*.asf
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
800x600
WMA
MP3
ADPCM
AAC
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
ADPCM
AAC
1920x1080
AC3
MPEG
LPCM
1920x1080
AC3
MPEG
PCM
1920x1080
AAC
MP3
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
Franais - 51
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 51
2009-03-30 2:24:59
TOOLS
/
/
Fonctions
Lecture/pause du fichier film
Lecture du fichier film
Pause du fichier film
Excuter diverses fonctions du menu Film.
Quitter le mode de lecture et revenir la liste des films.
Avance ou recule dans le fichier film.
Se dplacer au dbut ou la fin du fichier.
Lit le fichier vitesse double. Selon le fichier film, cette fonction pourrait ne pas tre prise en
charge.
Ou encore
1. Choisissez une cl de tri. Choisissez ensuite les fichiers du groupe dsir dans la section Liste des fichiers.
N Pour passer au groupe prcdent ou suivant, appuyez sur la touche (REW) ou (FF).
2. Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS.
3. Appuyez sur la touche ou pour choisir Lire groupe courant., puis sur ENTERE.
N Les fichiers film du groupe de classement, y compris le fichier slectionn, sont lus.
Franais - 52
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 52
2009-03-30 2:24:59
Outils
Modo rep.
On
Rglage de l'image
Rglage du son
Image Format
Ajustement
Image Format
Ajustement
Lecture dune vido la taille de lcran du tlviseur.
Original
Lecture dune vido sa taille dorigine.
Sous-titres On / Off
Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver le sous-titrage du film.
Synchronis. sous-titres
Vous pouvez modifier la synchronisation des sous-titres.
Information
Linformation du fichier film saffiche.
Supp. scurit
Il est possible de retirer le dispositif du tlviseur de faon sre.
Franais - 53
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 53
2009-03-30 2:24:59
SETUP
851.86MB/993.02MB Gratuite
Photo
SUM
Music
Movie
Setup
e Quitter
Appareil
Off
On
4h
Information
Supp. scurit
Si cette fonction est rgle ON, le temps de charge augmente pour
Information
Slectionner cette option pour visualiser linformation sur le dispositif branch.
Supp. scurit
Il est possible de retirer le dispositif du tlviseur de faon sre.
Franais - 54
BN68-02112C-Fre-2.indd 54
2009-03-31 11:48:50
ANyNET+
Branchement dappareils Anynet+
Quest-ce quAnynet+?
Anynet+ est une fonction qui permet de contrler, laide de la tlcommande de votre tlviseur Samsung, tous vos appareils
Samsung prenant en charge Anynet+. Le systme Anynet+ peut tre utilis uniquement avec les appareils Samsung dots de la
fonction Anynet+. Afin de vrifier si votre appareil Samsung est dot de cette fonction, vrifiez sil arbore le logo Anynet+.
Branchement au tlviseur
Appareil 1 Anynet+
Tv
Cble hDMI
1.
Appareil 2 Anynet+
Appareil Anynet+
Appareil 4 Anynet+
1. Raccordez la prise hDMI IN (1(DvI), 2, ou 4) du tlviseur la prise de sortie HDMI OUT de lappareil Anynet+
correspondant laide du cble HDMI.
Appareil 1 Anynet+
Cble
optique
Appareil Anynet+
Appareil 4 Anynet+
1. Raccordez la prise hDMI IN (1(DvI), 2, ou 4) du tlviseur la prise de sortie HDMI OUT de lappareil Anynet+
correspondant laide du cble HDMI.
2. Raccordez la prise d'entre HDMI IN de la chane de cinma maison et la prise de sortie HDMI OUT de l'appareil Anynet+
correspondant l'aide d'un cble HDMI.
N Branchez le cble optique entre la prise de sortie DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) du tlviseur et la prise d'entre
audio numrique de la chane de cinma maison.
N En suivant les instructions de connexion ci-avant, la prise optique alimente uniquement les priphriques audio 2 canaux.
Vous entendrez du son uniquement au niveau des haut-parleurs gauche et droit avant de votre chane de cinma maison
et du caisson d'extrmes graves. Pour avoir le son en 5.1 canaux, branchez la prise de sortie DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(OPTICAL) du rcepteur DVD ou satellite (c.--d. l'appareil Anynet 1 ou 2) directement l'amplificateur ou la chane de
cinma maison, et non au tlviseur.
N Connexion uniquement une chane de cinma maison.
N Il est possible de brancher un appareil Anynet+ laide du cble HDMI 1.3 Certains cbles HDMI ne prennent pas en
charge des fonctions Anynet+.
N Anynet+ fonctionne lorsque lappareil AV compatible avec Anynet+ est en mode Veille ou en mode Marche.
N Anynet+ prend en charge jusqu' 12 appareils audiovisuels. Vous pouvez connecter jusqu 3 appareils du mme type.
franais -
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 55
2009-03-30 2:25:00
Configuration
Application
T Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez galement
afficher le menu Anynet+ en slectionnant Outils Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC).
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
InfoLink
Configuration
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
: Marche
Arrt automatique
: Oui
Configuration
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
: Marche
Arrt automatique
: Oui
Regarder tlviseur
Liste appareils
Enregistrer: DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Rcepteur: Arrt
Configuration
Menu Anynet+
Le menu Anynet+ varie selon le type et ltat des appareils Anynet+ branchs au tlviseur.
Anynet+
Regarder tlviseur
Liste appareils
(Nom de Dispositif) MENU
(Nom de Dispositif) INFO
Enregistrer: (*enregistreur)
Arrter l'enregistrement:
(*enregistreur)
Rcepteur
Description
Anynet+ au mode de diffusion tlviseur.
Affiche la liste des appareils Anynet+.
Affiche les menus des appareils branchs. Par exemple, si un enregistreur DVD est
branch, le menu du disque de celui-ci saffiche.
Affiche les menus de lecture des appareils branchs. Par exemple, si un enregistreur DVD
est branch, le menu de lecture du disque de celui-ci saffiche.
Lance aussitt lenregistrement sur lenregistreur. (Disponible seulement pour les appareils
avec fonction denregistrement.)
Arrte lenregistrement.
Le son provient du rcepteur.
N Si plusieurs enregistreurs sont branchs, ceux-ci saffichent comme (*enregistreur). Si un seul enregistreur est branch, il est
reprsent par (*nom_appareil).
Franais - 56
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 56
2009-03-30 2:25:00
tat de fonctionnement
Touches accessibles
Appareil Anynet+
Touches numriques /
Touche //// ENTERE/
Touches de couleur / Touche EXIT
Appareil avec
syntoniseur intgr
Appareil audio
N La fonction Anynet+ ne fonctionne que lorsque la source active de la tlcommande du tlviseur est rgle TV.
N La touche fonctionne uniquement en mode d'enregistrement.
N Vous ne pouvez pas commander les appareils Anynet+ l'aide des touches du tlviseur. Seule la tlcommande du
tlviseur permet de commander les appareils Anynet+.
N Il est possible que la tlcommande du tlviseur ne fonctionne pas dans certaines conditions. Le cas chant, slectionnez
nouveau lappareil Anynet+.
N Les fonctions Anynet+ ne fonctionnent pas avec des produits dautres marques.
N Les fonctions des touches et peuvent varier selon lappareil.
Enregistrement
Il est possible denregistrer une mission tlvise laide dun enregistreur Samsung.
1. Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS. Appuyez sur la touche ENTERE pour slectionner la
fonction Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC).
Regarder tlviseur
Liste appareils
Enregistrer: DVDR
Regarder tlviseur
Liste appareils
Enregistrer: DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Rcepteur: Arrt
Configuration
Franais - 57
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 57
2009-03-30 2:25:00
Solution possible
Vrifier si lappareil est bien un appareil Anynet+. Le systme Anynet+ ne prend en charge que
les appareils Anynet+.
Ne brancher qu'un seul rcepteur (chane de cinma maison).
Vrifier si le cordon dalimentation de lappareil Anynet+ est correctement branch.
Vrifier les branchements des cbles vido/audio/HDMI 1.3 de lappareil Anynet+.
Vrifier si la fonction Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) est rgle Marche dans le menu Configuration
dAnynet+.
Vrifier si la tlcommande est en mode TV.
Vrifier sil sagit de la tlcommande exclusive Anynet+.
Anynet+ ne fonctionne pas dans certaines conditions. (recherche de canaux, utilisation de
Media Play, Prt Iemploi, etc.)
Au moment du branchement ou du dbranchement du cble HDMI 1.3, s'assurer deffectuer une
nouvelle dtection des appareils ou de mettre le tlviseur hors tension et le redmarrer.
Vrifier si la fonction Anynet+ de lappareil Anynet+ est active.
Je souhaite lancer Anynet+.
Vrifier si lappareil Anynet+ est correctement branch au tlviseur et si la fonction Anynet+
(HDMI-CEC) est Marche dans le menu de configuration d' Anynet+ .
Appuyer sur la touche TV de la tlcommande du tlviseur pour permuter vers le tlviseur.
Appuyer ensuite sur la touche TOOLS pour afficher le menu Anynet+ et slectionner le menu
dsir.
Je souhaite quitter Anynet+.
Slectionner Regarder tlviseur dans le menu Anynet+.
Appuyer sur la touche SOURCE de la tlcommande du tlviseur pour slectionner un appareil
autre que les appareils Anynet+.
Appuyer sur les touches z, CH LIST, PRE-CH et FAV.CH pour changer de mode au
tlviseur. (Remarque : la touche des canaux ne fonctionne que si aucun appareil syntoniseur
intgr Anynet+ nest branch)
Le message Connexion
La tlcommande ne peut tre utilise pendant la configuration dAnynet+ ou pour permuter vers
un mode de visionnement.
Iappareil Anynet+ saffiche
lcran.
Utiliser la tlcommande lorsque le rglage dAnynet+ ou la permutation vers le mode de
visionnement sont termins.
Lappareil Anynet+ ne lit pas. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser la fonction lecture lorsque le mode Plug & Play est en cours
dexcution.
Lappareil branch nest pas
Vrifier si lappareil prend en charge les fonctions Anynet+.
affich.
Vrifier si le cble HDMI 1.3 est bien branch.
Vrifier si la fonction Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) est rgle Marche dans le menu Configuration
dAnynet+.
Rechercher les appareils Anynet+ nouveau.
Seul le cble HDMI 1.3 permet de brancher un appareil Anynet+. Certains cbles HDMI ne
prennent pas en charge des fonctions Anynet+.
Sil y a interruption suite une anomalie, par exemple si le cble HDMI ou le cordon
dalimentation est dconnect, ou sil y a une panne de courant, rpter le balayage de
dtection.
Lmission ne peut pas tre
Vrifier si la prise dantenne de lappareil enregistreur est branche correctement.
enregistre.
Le son du tlviseur ne sort
Brancher le cble optique entre le tlviseur et le rcepteur.
pas par le rcepteur.
Franais - 58
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 58
2009-03-30 2:25:00
InfoLink
Utilisation du service InfoLink
Media Play (USB)
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Application
Vous pouvez consulter les nouvelles les plus rcentes, les cotes de la Bourse et la mto
l'aide du service InfoLink de SAMSUNG.
N Pour de plus amples renseignements sur la configuration du rseau, reportez-vous la
section Configuration du rseau. (voir pages 30~35)
N Les renseignements fournis provenant du USA TODAY par l'entremise du service InfoLink
sont pour les tats-Unis seulement. Aucune information pour les autres pays n'est fournie.
InfoLink
Mto
L Dpl. R Retour
Configuration de la rgion
Mto
L Dpl. e Sortie
Option
3. Appuyez sur la touche jaune. Entrez le code zip (aux tats-Unis seulement) de la rgion
en appuyant sur les touches numrotes de la tlcommande puis appuyez sur la touche
ENTERE.
N Vous pouvez consulter la mto pour la rgion slectionne.
Mto actuelle
Prvisions mto
E Choisir R Retour
Washington
59F
Franais - 59
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 59
2009-03-30 2:25:01
Nouvelles
L Dpl. e Sortie
2. Appuyez sur la touche ou pour vous dplacer sur le service Nouvelles et appuyez
sur ENTERE.
N Appuyez sur la touche ENTERE pour voir le dtail de l'objet.
N Appuyez sur la touche ou pour voir l'objet prcdent ou suivant.
Option
News
Money
Politics
Life
Sports
World
E Choisir R Retour
3. Appuyez sur la touche rouge pendant que vous utilisez le service pour modifier l'option
Nouvelles du service.
News
Option
Actions
L Dpl. e Sortie
Actions favorites
Sommaire du march
Actions et nouvelles
E Choisir R Retour
3. Appuyez sur la touche rouge pendant que vous utilisez le service pour modifier l'option
Actions du service.
4. Appuyez sur la touche ou pour choisir loption de service Actions, puis sur
ENTERE.
Actions favorites
L'information sur le titre favori est affiche. Appuyez sur la touche jaune pour configurer l'option Actions favorites.
Sommaire du march
Dow Jones, NASDAQ et S&P 500 sont permuts et l'index, les augmentations ou diminutions et le pourcentage sont affichs.
Actions et nouvelles
Les renseignements du titre favoris, les index et les nouvelles financires sur le Dow Jones, NASDAQ et S&P 500 sont affichs.
N Les cotes des titres sont annonces avec un retard de 15 minutes au moins.
N Pour quitter le service Actions, appuyez sur la touche bleue.
N Pour quitter le service InfoLink, appuyez sur la touche EXIT.
c
c
A
AA
AAI
AAR
AAB
3/1844
NASDAQ
Franais - 60
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 60
2009-03-30 2:25:02
Configuration dInfoLink
1. Appuyez sur la touche INFO.L de la tlcommande.
2. Appuyez sur la touche ou pour choisir Configuration, puis sur ENTERE.
3. Appuyez sur la touche ou pour choisir loption voulue, puis sur ENTERE.
N Pour quitter le service Configuration, appuyez sur la touche RETURN.
N Pour quitter le service InfoLink, appuyez sur la touche EXIT.
InfoLinks Setup
Lancement auto.
Dure de laffichage
Taille de la police
Couleur arrire-plan
InfoLinks Position
: Arrt
: 4 heures
: Standard
: Noir
Lancement auto.
Dtermine s'il faut lancer automatiquement le mode InfoLink lorsque le tlviseur est sous tension. Vous pouvez slectionner Arrt
ou Marche.
Dure de laffichage
Dtermine la dure d'affichage des nouvelles l'cran. Il est possible de slectionner 4heures, 8heures,
10heuresouToujours.
Taille de la police
Le service InfoLink permet de slectionner Standard ou Grand .
Couleur arrire-plan
Permet de rgler la couleur de larrire-plan du service InfoLink. La couleur s'applique toutes les fentres de service, d'option et
de configuration.
InfoLinks Position
Permet de rgler la position de chaque service InfoLink lcran. La slection peut seffectuer partir de six positions InfoLink
prdfinies (Position 1~Position 6).
Franais - 61
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 61
2009-03-30 2:25:02
RECOMMANDATIONS
Dpannage
Le tableau ci-dessous dresse la liste des problmes courants et suggre des solutions. Si aucun de ces conseils de dpannage ne
permet de corriger le problme, communiquez avec le service la clientle de Samsung en composant le 1-800-SAMSUNG.
Problme
Solution possible
Essayez un autre canal. / Rglez lantenne. / Vrifiez tous les branchements de cbles.
Il ny a pas de son ou le son est trop Dans un premier temps, vrifiez le volume pour les lments branchs sur votre
bas alors que le volume est rgl
tlviseur (rcepteur de diffusion numrique, DTV, DVD, rcepteur de diffusion par cble,
au maximum.
magntoscope, etc.). Rglez ensuite le volume du tlviseur en consquence. Pour
dsactiver la transmission du contenu mdia partir d'un Slect. le haut-parleur.
Limage roule verticalement.
La tlvision fonctionne
irrgulirement.
La tlcommande ne fonctionne
pas.
Assurez- vous que le cble dinterface est solidement branch aux sources PC.
Assurez-vous que les cbles pour composante sont branchs aux prises
correspondantes.
Image embrouille.
Image embrouille.
La raison peut tre une incompatibilit avec votre cbloslecteur. Pour supprimer ce
problme, branchez les cbles pour composante.
Franais - 62
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 62
2009-03-30 2:25:02
Problme
Solution possible
Sur votre ordinateur, vrifiez: lalimentation, le cble de signal. La tlvision est en mode
gestion dnergie. Dplacez la souris de lordinateur ou appuyez sur une touche du clavier.
Rglez la position horizontale et verticale. La position de lcran doit tre rgle sur la
source de sortie (c.--d. STB) laide dun signal numrique.
Si la fonction Plein cran est slectionne pour certains appareils externes, limage peut
sembler dforme dans un angle de lcran. Ce dommage est caus par les appareils
externes et non par le tlviseur.
N Lcran TFT DEL utilise un affichage constitu de pixels secondaires (6 220 800) ncessitant une technologie sophistique.
Cependant, il se peut quil y ait lcran quelques pixels lumineux ou noirs. Ces pixels nont aucun impact sur les
performances de ce produit.
Installation du support
N Prrglage: Placez le guide de support et le collet sur le support et fixez-les
laide des vis. Applicables aux modles (UN32B6000) seulement.
Arrire
Avant
Retrait du support
Franais - 63
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 63
2009-03-30 2:25:04
1
2
fixation murale
franais - 64
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 64
2009-03-30 2:25:09
LED-TV
PDP-TV
LFD
pouces
Spc. vESA (A * B)
19~22
100 X 100
23~29
200 X 100
30~40
200 X 200
46~55
400 X 400
57~70
800 X 400
80~
1400 X 800
42~50
400 X 400
58~63
600 X 400
70~
800 X 400
80~
1400 X 800
30~39
200 X 200
40~52
400 X 400
55~70
800 X 400
70~
1400 X 800
vis standard
Quantit
M4
M6
M8
M8
M6
M8
Ninstallez pas l'ensemble d'installation murale lorsque le tlviseur est en fonctionnement. Une blessure par
choc lectrique pourrait en rsulter.
franais - 6
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 65
2009-03-30 2:25:10
3
2
1
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
franais - 66
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 66
2009-03-30 2:25:11
Attention : Le tlviseur pourrait tomber si vous le tirez ou le poussez ou si vous y grimpez. Assurez-vous que
les enfants ne se pendent pas au-dessus du tlviseur ou qu'ils ne le dstabilisent pas; le tlviseur pourrait
basculer et causer des blessures graves ou la mort. Suivez les consignes de scurit fournies dans le prospectus
de scurit inclus. Pour plus de stabilit, installez le dispositif anti-chute par mesure de scurit en suivant les
tapes donnes ci-dessous.
Support pour
tlviseur
Vis 1 (M8xL19)
1. Retirez les vis du coin suprieur droit l'arrire du botier du tlviseur. Fixez le support pour tlviseur au tlviseur en
serrant la vis 1 (pour fixer le tlviseur) dans l'orifice.
N Assurez-vous de n'utilisez que les vis fournies.
armoire
2. Fixez solidement les vis au mur ou l'armoire auquel sera install le tlviseur. Fixez le support attach au tlviseur aux vis
sur le mur ou armoire afin d'installer le tlviseur.
N Les vis utilises au mur ou dans l'armoire sont vendues sparment.
N Fixez le tlviseur prs du mur pour ne pas qu'il ne tombe.
N Lorsque vous fixez le tlviseur au mur, attachez le cordon de niveau avec le sol ou inclin vers le bas par mesure de
scurit.
N Assurez-vous que le cordon ou le lien ne se dtache pas.
N Avant de dplacer le tlviseur, dbranchez d'abord le cordon.
armoire
armoire
. Vrifiez l'tat des connexions. Inspectez priodiquement les connexions en cas de signes de fatigue ou de pannes. Si vous
n'tes pas certain des connexions effectuer, communiquez avec un installateur professionnel.
franais - 67
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 67
2009-03-30 2:25:12
Spcifications
Modle
UN32B6000
Taille de lcran
(diagonale)
32 pouces
(31.5 pouces en diagonale)
Rsolution PC
(Optimale)
1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz
Son
(Sortie)
Dimensions (L x P x H)
Sans support
Avec support
10W x 2
31.5 x 1.2 x 20.5 (po) / 799 x 29.9 x 520.9 (mm)
31.5 x 10.0 x 22.8 (po) / 799 x 255 x 579.9 (mm)
Poids
Sans support
Avec support
21.9 lb / 9.95 Kg
30.3 lb / 13.75 Kg
Facteurs environnementaux
Temprature de fonctionnement
Niveau d'humidit durant le fonctionnement
Temprature pour l'entreposage
Niveau d'humidit pour l'entreposage
Support pivotant
(Gauche / Droite)
-20 ~ 20
Modle
UN40B6000
Taille de lcran
(diagonale)
40 pouces
(40.0 pouces en diagonale)
Rsolution PC
(Optimale)
1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz
Son
(Sortie)
Dimensions (L x P x H)
Sans support
Avec support
10W x 2
38.7 x 1.2 x 24.8 (po) / 983 x 29.9 x 631 (mm)
38.7 x 10.0 x 27.1 (po) / 983 x 255 x 688 (mm)
Poids
Sans support
Avec support
32.4 lb / 14.7 Kg
40.6 lb / 18.4 Kg
Facteurs environnementaux
Temprature de fonctionnement
Niveau d'humidit durant le fonctionnement
Temprature pour l'entreposage
Niveau d'humidit pour l'entreposage
Support pivotant
(Gauche / Droite)
-20 ~ 20
Franais - 68
BN68-02112C-Fre-3.indd 68
2009-03-31 8:50:45
Modle
UN46B6000
Taille de lcran
(diagonale)
46 pouces
(46.0 pouces en diagonale)
Rsolution PC
(Optimale)
1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz
Son
(Sortie)
Dimensions (L x P x H)
Sans support
Avec support
10W x 2
43.9 x 1.2 x 27.8 (po) / 1129 x 29.9 x 705 (mm)
43.9 x 10.8 x 30.0 (po) / 1129 x 275 x 763 (mm)
Poids
Sans support
Avec support
39.7 lb / 18.0 Kg
50.3 lb / 22.8 Kg
Facteurs environnementaux
Temprature de fonctionnement
Niveau d'humidit durant le fonctionnement
Temprature pour l'entreposage
Niveau d'humidit pour l'entreposage
Support pivotant
(Gauche / Droite)
-20 ~ 20
Modle
UN55B6000
Taille de lcran
(diagonale)
55 pouces
(54.7 pouces en diagonale)
Rsolution PC
(Optimale)
1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz
Son
(Sortie)
Dimensions (L x P x H)
Sans support
Avec support
15W x 2
51.5 x 1.2 x 32.1 (po) / 1307 x 29.9 x 815 (mm)
51.5 x 12.0 x 34.4 (po) / 1307 x 305 x 873 (mm)
Poids
Sans support
Avec support
49.4 lb / 22.4 Kg
60.8 lb / 27.6 Kg
Facteurs environnementaux
Temprature de fonctionnement
Niveau d'humidit durant le fonctionnement
Temprature pour l'entreposage
Niveau d'humidit pour l'entreposage
Support pivotant
(Gauche / Droite)
-20 ~ 20
Franais - 69
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 69
2009-03-30 2:25:12
Dimensions
UN32B6000
VUE DE DESSUS
31.5
26.4
20.5
15.5
22.8
10.0
17.5
VUE AVANT / VUE LATRALE
7.9
(200 mm)
7.9 (200 mm)
VUE ARRIRE
REMARQUE: Tous les dessins ne sont pas ncessairement
des reprsentations lchelle. Certaines dimensions peuvent
avoir t changes sans avis. Mesurez les dimensions
avant d'installer votre tlviseur. Nous nassumons aucune
responsabilit pour les erreurs typographiques ou dimpression.
2009 Samsung Electronics America, Inc.
Franais - 70
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 70
2009-03-30 2:25:13
UN40B6000
VUE DE DESSUS
38.7
34.9
24.8
19.6
27.1
10.0
20.5
VUE AVANT / VUE LATRALE
7.9
(200 mm)
7.9 (200 mm)
VUE ARRIRE
REMARQUE: Tous les dessins ne sont pas ncessairement
des reprsentations lchelle. Certaines dimensions peuvent
avoir t changes sans avis. Mesurez les dimensions
avant d'installer votre tlviseur. Nous nassumons aucune
responsabilit pour les erreurs typographiques ou dimpression.
2009 Samsung Electronics America, Inc.
Franais - 71
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 71
2009-03-30 2:25:13
UN46B6000
VUE DE DESSUS
43.9
40.1
27.8
22.6
30.0
10.8
21.7
VUE AVANT / VUE LATRALE
15.7
(400 mm)
15.7 (400 mm)
VUE ARRIRE
REMARQUE: Tous les dessins ne sont pas ncessairement
des reprsentations lchelle. Certaines dimensions peuvent
avoir t changes sans avis. Mesurez les dimensions
avant d'installer votre tlviseur. Nous nassumons aucune
responsabilit pour les erreurs typographiques ou dimpression.
2009 Samsung Electronics America, Inc.
Franais - 72
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 72
2009-03-30 2:25:13
UN55B6000
VUE DE DESSUS
51.5
47.6
32.1
26.8
34.4
12.0
21.7
VUE AVANT / VUE LATRALE
15.7
(400 mm)
15.7 (400 mm)
VUE ARRIRE
REMARQUE: Tous les dessins ne sont pas ncessairement
des reprsentations lchelle. Certaines dimensions peuvent
avoir t changes sans avis. Mesurez les dimensions
avant d'installer votre tlviseur. Nous nassumons aucune
responsabilit pour les erreurs typographiques ou dimpression.
2009 Samsung Electronics America, Inc.
Franais - 73
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 73
2009-03-30 2:25:13
[6000-NA]BN68-02112C-Fre.indb 74
2009-03-30 2:25:13